[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025039800A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025039800A1
WO2025039800A1 PCT/CN2024/105529 CN2024105529W WO2025039800A1 WO 2025039800 A1 WO2025039800 A1 WO 2025039800A1 CN 2024105529 W CN2024105529 W CN 2024105529W WO 2025039800 A1 WO2025039800 A1 WO 2025039800A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
network
mobility management
request message
network element
operator
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/CN2024/105529
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
张志芹
封召
周润泽
王远
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Publication of WO2025039800A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025039800A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/14Reselecting a network or an air interface
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/16Performing reselection for specific purposes
    • H04W36/18Performing reselection for specific purposes for allowing seamless reselection, e.g. soft reselection
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00Network data management
    • H04W8/02Processing of mobility data, e.g. registration information at HLR [Home Location Register] or VLR [Visitor Location Register]; Transfer of mobility data, e.g. between HLR, VLR or external networks
    • H04W8/08Mobility data transfer

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and device.
  • the current roaming scenario only supports the continuity of services when the terminal device moves between coverage areas of different network standards (4G coverage area and 5G coverage area) in the visited operator network, but does not support the continuity of services when the terminal device moves between coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network. For example, when a terminal device accesses the visited operator network and moves from the 5G coverage area of the visited operator network to the 4G coverage area of the home operator network, the terminal device will disconnect from the visited operator network and re-initiate a registration request to the home operator network during the movement, which will cause service interruption of the terminal device.
  • 4G coverage area and 5G coverage area 4G coverage area
  • the terminal device will disconnect from the visited operator network and re-initiate a registration request to the home operator network during the movement, which will cause service interruption of the terminal device.
  • the present application provides a communication method and apparatus for ensuring that service continuity is maintained when a terminal device moves between coverage areas of different network standards of a home operator network and a visited operator network.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a first mobility management network element, a processor, a chip, a chip system or a functional module of the first mobility management network element.
  • the method may include: the first mobility management network element receives a first switching request message from a first access network device, and according to the first switching request message, determines to allow a terminal device to switch from a first standard network in a first operator network to a second standard network in a second operator network; the first mobility management network element sends a second switching request message to the second mobility management network element.
  • the first switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from a first standard network in a first operator network to a second standard network in a second operator network;
  • the first access network device is a shared access network device, and the terminal device accesses the first standard network in the first operator network through the first access network device;
  • the second switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network;
  • the first mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network, and the second mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the second operator network.
  • the switching request between different standards initiated by the terminal device in the visited operator network can be converted into two steps: switching between the same standard between the home operator network and the visited operator network and switching between different standards of the home operator network. Subsequently, it can be ensured that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between the coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network.
  • the first handover request message may include an identifier of a first public land mobile network (PLMN) currently used by the terminal device, and the first mobile management network element determines, based on the first handover request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network.
  • the method may be: the first mobile management network element determines that the identifier of the first PLMN is a shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network, and the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access a shared access network device of the first operator network. In this way, the first mobile management network element can accurately determine that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network.
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • the first switching request message may also include an identifier of a target access network device of the terminal device; further, the first mobility management network element may determine an identifier of a second PLMN to which the target access network device belongs based on the identifier of the target access network device, and the second PLMN corresponds to the second operator network ....
  • the first mobile management network element determines that the identifier of the first PLMN is the shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network.
  • the method may be: the first mobile management network element determines that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs according to the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN.
  • the first mobile management network element can determine that the identifier of the first PLMN is the shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network, and further accurately determine that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network.
  • the first mobility management network element determines that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs according to the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN.
  • the method may be: the first mobility management network element determines that there is an equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN. In this way, the first mobility management network element accurately determines that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs.
  • the first mobility management network element before the first mobility management network element sends the second switching request message to the second mobility management network element, it can generate the second switching request message based on the first switching request message, so that the first mobility management network element sends an accurate second switching request message to the second mobility management network element.
  • the first mobility management network element generates the second handover request message according to the first handover request message
  • the method may be: the first mobility management network element generates the second handover request message, and the second handover request message includes the identifier of the second PLMN and the information in the first handover request message except the identifier of the first PLMN. In this way, the first mobility management network element can accurately determine the second handover request message.
  • the first mobility management network element when the first switching request message includes a first switching reason value, and the first switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the first standard network to the second standard network, the first mobility management network element sends the second switching request message to the second mobility management network element. In this way, the first mobility management network element can forward the second switching request message to the second mobility management network element in the second operator network.
  • the second switching request message includes the first switching reason value.
  • the second handover request message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the second mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the first mobility management network element. In this way, the second mobility management network element can subsequently forward the received handover completion notification message to the first mobility management network element.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a second mobile management network element, a processor, a chip, a chip system or a functional module of the second mobile management network element.
  • the method may include: the second mobile management network element receives a second switching request message from the first mobile management network element, and sends a third switching request message to the third mobile management network element according to the second switching request message.
  • the second switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network;
  • the third switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network;
  • the first mobile management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network
  • the second mobile management network element belongs to the first standard network in the second operator network
  • the third mobile management network element belongs to the second standard network in the second operator network.
  • the second mobility management network element sends the third handover request message to the third mobility management network element according to the second handover request message
  • the method may be: when the second handover request message includes a first handover reason value, and the first handover reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the first standard network to the second standard network, the second mobility management network element may send the third handover request message to the third mobility management network element.
  • the second mobility management network element may select a suitable third mobility management network element according to the first handover reason value, and send the third handover request message to the third mobility management network element.
  • the second handover request message may include first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the second mobility management network element to send the received handover completion notification message to the first mobility management network element; further, the second mobility management network element receives a handover completion notification message from the third mobility management network element, and the handover completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that the terminal device has been switched to the second standard network in the second operator network; the second mobility management network element sends the handover completion notification message to the first mobility management network element according to the first indication information. In this way, the first mobility management network element can determine that the terminal device has been switched to the second standard network in the second operator network.
  • the second switching request message includes an identifier of a second PLMN, and the identifier of the second PLMN is used to identify the PLMN to which the target access network device of the terminal device belongs.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a second mobility management network element, a processor, a chip, a chip system or a functional module of the second mobility management network element.
  • the method may include: the second mobility management network element receives a first switching request message from a third mobility management network element, and according to the first switching request message, determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device, and the target access network device is used for the terminal device to access the first operator network; the second mobility management network element sends a second switching request message to the first mobility management network element according to the first switching request message.
  • the first switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network;
  • the second switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network;
  • the first mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network, the second mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the second operator network, and the third mobility management network element belongs to the second standard network in the second operator network.
  • the switching request between different standards of the terminal device between the home operator network and the visited operator network can be converted into two steps: switching between different standards within the home operator network and switching between the same standard between the home operator network and the visited operator network. This can ensure that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between the coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network.
  • the first handover request message may include an identifier of the target access network device; the second mobility management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device according to the first handover request message, and the method may be: the second mobility management network element determines the identifier of the first PLMN to which the target access network device belongs according to the identifier of the target access network device, and the first PLMN corresponds to the first operator network; if the identifier of the first PLMN corresponds to the shared PLMN identifier, the second mobility management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is the shared access network device; wherein the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access the shared access network device of the first operator network. In this way, the second mobility management network element can accurately determine that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device.
  • the second mobility management network element may send the second handover request message to the first mobility management network element. In this way, the second mobility management network element may forward the second handover request message to the first mobility management network element in the first operator network.
  • the second handover request message may be generated according to the first handover request message, and the second handover request message includes the shared PLMN identifier and the information included in the first handover request message. In this way, the second mobility management network element can send an accurate second handover request message to the first mobility management network element.
  • the second handover request message may include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to instruct the first mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the second mobility management network element. In this way, the first mobility management network element can subsequently forward the received handover completion notification message to the second mobility management network element.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a first mobile management network element, a processor, a chip, a chip system or a functional module of the first mobile management network element.
  • the method may include: the first mobile management network element receives a second switching request message from the second mobile management network element, and according to the second switching request message, determines to allow the terminal device to switch from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network; thereafter, the first mobile management network element sends a session establishment request message to the first session management network element according to the second switching request message.
  • the second switching request message is used to request to switch the terminal device from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network; the first mobile management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network, the second mobile management network element belongs to the first standard network in the second operator network, and the first session management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network.
  • the switching request between different standards of the terminal device between the home operator network and the visited operator network is converted into two steps: switching between different standards within the home operator network and switching between the same standard between the home operator network and the visited operator network. This can ensure that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between the coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network.
  • the second handover request message may include a shared PLMN identifier.
  • the first mobile management network element determines, based on the second switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network.
  • the method may be: when the identifier of the second PLMN currently used by the terminal device has an equivalent mapping relationship with the shared PLMN identifier, the first mobile management network element determines that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network. In this way, the first mobile management network element can accurately determine that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network.
  • the second handover request message may include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to instruct the first mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the second mobility management network element; further, after receiving the handover completion notification message, the first mobility management network element sends the handover completion notification message to the second mobility management network element according to the second indication information.
  • the handover completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that it has switched to the first standard network in the first operator network. In this way, the second mobility management network element can determine that the terminal device has switched to the first standard network in the first operator network.
  • the present application further provides a communication device, which may be a first mobile management network element, and the communication device has the function of implementing the method in the first aspect or each possible design example of the first aspect, or the fourth aspect or each possible design example of the fourth aspect.
  • the function may be implemented by hardware, or may be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • the structure of the communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit, which can execute the methods described in the above-mentioned first aspect or various possible design examples of the first aspect, or the above-mentioned fourth aspect or various possible design examples of the fourth aspect, which are not repeated here.
  • the present application further provides a communication device, which may be a second mobility management network element, and the communication device has the function of implementing the method in the second aspect or each possible design example of the second aspect, or the third aspect or each possible design example of the third aspect.
  • the function may be implemented by hardware, or may be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • the structure of the communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit, which can execute the methods described in the above-mentioned second aspect or various possible design examples of the second aspect, or the above-mentioned third aspect or various possible design examples of the third aspect, which are not repeated here.
  • the structure of the communication device includes a memory and a processor.
  • the optional communication device also includes a transceiver, which is used to send and receive data, messages or information, and is used to communicate and interact with other devices in the communication system.
  • the processor is configured to support the communication device to perform the corresponding functions in the above-mentioned second aspect or each possible design example of the second aspect, or in the above-mentioned third aspect or each possible design example of the third aspect.
  • the memory is coupled to the processor, which stores the computer instructions and data necessary for the communication device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, which may include a first mobile management network element and a second mobile management network element, wherein the first mobile management network element may execute the method in the above-mentioned first aspect and any possible design thereof, or the above-mentioned fourth aspect and any possible design thereof; the second mobile management network element is used to execute the method in the above-mentioned second aspect and any possible design thereof, or the above-mentioned third aspect and any possible design thereof.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores instructions.
  • the computer executes the method described in the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application and any possible design thereof, or the second aspect and any possible design thereof, or the third aspect and any possible design thereof, or the fourth aspect and any possible design thereof.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer.
  • a computer-readable medium may include a non-transitory computer-readable medium, a random-access memory (RAM), a read-only memory (ROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, a magnetic disk storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or a medium that can be used to carry or store instructions or Any other medium that can store desired program code in the form of data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.
  • RAM random-access memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD-ROM or other optical disk storage a magnetic disk storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or a medium that can be used to carry or store instructions or Any other medium that can store desired program code in the form of data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, comprising instructions, which, when executed on a computer, causes the method described in the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect, or the second aspect or any possible design of the second aspect, or the third aspect or any possible design of the third aspect, or the fourth aspect or any possible design of the fourth aspect to be executed.
  • the present application also provides a chip, including a processor, which is coupled to a memory and is used to read and execute instructions stored in the memory, so that the chip implements the method described in the above-mentioned first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect, or the above-mentioned second aspect or any possible design of the second aspect, or the above-mentioned third aspect or any possible design of the third aspect, or the above-mentioned fourth aspect or any possible design of the fourth aspect.
  • a chip including a processor, which is coupled to a memory and is used to read and execute instructions stored in the memory, so that the chip implements the method described in the above-mentioned first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect, or the above-mentioned second aspect or any possible design of the second aspect, or the above-mentioned third aspect or any possible design of the third aspect, or the above-mentioned fourth aspect or any possible design of the fourth aspect.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario
  • FIG2 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario
  • FIG3 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application.
  • FIG4 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application.
  • FIG5 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application.
  • FIG6 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application.
  • FIG7 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application.
  • FIG8 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application.
  • FIG9 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application.
  • FIG10 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application.
  • FIG11 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided by the present application.
  • FIG12 is a structural diagram of a communication device provided in the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method and device to ensure that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between the coverage areas of the home operator network and the visited operator network with different network standards.
  • the method and device described in the present application are based on the same technical concept. Since the principles of solving the problem by the method and the device are similar, the implementation of the device and the method can refer to each other, and the repeated parts will not be repeated.
  • Access network equipment equipment used to provide access for terminal equipment.
  • Access network equipment may include radio access network (RAN) equipment, such as base stations.
  • RAN radio access network
  • Access network equipment may be a base station, an evolved Node B in a long term evolution (LTE) system or an advanced long term evolution (LTE-A), which may be referred to as eNB or e-NodeB for short), a transmission reception point (TRP), a next generation base station (next generation NodeB, gNB) in a fifth generation (5G) mobile communication system, a next generation base station in a sixth generation (6G) mobile communication system, a base station in a future mobile communication system, or an access node in a wireless local area network (WiFi) system, etc.
  • 5G fifth generation
  • 6G sixth generation
  • WiFi wireless local area network
  • the access network device may also be an access network device in an open access network (open RAN, ORAN) system, etc.
  • the access network device may also be a module or unit that completes part of the functions of the base station.
  • the access network device may be a centralized unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU), a CU-control plane (CP), a CU-user plane (UP), or a radio unit (RU), etc.
  • the CU here completes the functions of the radio resource control protocol and the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) of the base station, and can also complete the function of the service data adaptation protocol (SDAP); the DU completes the functions of the radio link control layer and the medium access control (MAC) layer of the base station, and can also complete part of the physical layer or all of the physical layer.
  • the CU or CU-CP
  • the CU-UP), DU or RU may also have different names, but those skilled in the art can understand their meanings.
  • CU may also be called O-CU
  • DU may also be called open (open, O)-DU
  • CU-CP may also be called O-CU-CP
  • CU-UP may also be called O-CUP-UP
  • RU may also be called O-RU.
  • the access network device may be a macro base station, a micro base station (also called a small station) or an indoor station, or a relay node or a donor node, etc.
  • the access network device may also be a radio network controller (RNC), a node B (NB), a base station controller (BSC), a base transceiver station (BTS), a home base station (e.g., home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), a baseband unit (BBU) or a remote radio unit (RRU), or a wireless fidelity (Wifi) access point (AP), or a baseband pool (BBU pool) and RRU in a cloud radio access network (CRAN), etc.
  • RNC radio network controller
  • NB node B
  • BSC base station controller
  • BTS base transceiver station
  • HNB home base station
  • BBU baseband unit
  • RRU remote radio unit
  • AP wireless fidelity
  • BBU pool baseband pool
  • CRAN cloud radio access
  • the access network device may also be a functional module, a chip or a chip system.
  • the functional module, the chip or the chip system may be arranged in the access network device.
  • the shared access network device is an access network device that can be shared between different operators, and the shared access network device can be a 5G access network device.
  • Terminal equipment also known as user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), etc.
  • terminal equipment may include handheld devices with wireless connection functions, vehicle-mounted devices, etc.
  • terminal devices can be: mobile phones, tablet computers, laptops, PDAs, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, augmented reality (AR) devices, XR devices, MR devices, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, or wireless terminals in smart homes, etc.
  • the terminal device may also be a device-to-device (D2D) communication terminal device, a vehicle to everything (V2X) communication terminal device, an intelligent vehicle, a telematics box (TBOX), a machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC) terminal device, or an Internet of Things (IoT) terminal device.
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • TBOX telematics box
  • M2M/MTC machine-to-machine/machine-type communications
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • the terminal device may be a vehicle, ship, or aircraft, or a terminal-type roadside unit, or a communication module or chip built into a vehicle or roadside unit.
  • the terminal device may be a vehicle-mounted module.
  • the terminal device may also be a roadside unit (RSU).
  • RSU roadside unit
  • the terminal device may also be a functional module, a chip or a chip system.
  • the functional module, the chip or the chip system may be arranged in the terminal device.
  • PLMN Public land mobile network
  • PLMN can be a network established and operated by the government or operators to provide land mobile communication services to the public.
  • the network can be interconnected with the public switched telephone network (PSTN) to form a communication network on a regional or national scale.
  • PSTN public switched telephone network
  • PLMN is used to distinguish different mobile communication operators in a country or region.
  • a service area can be composed of one or several PLMNs.
  • PLMN consists of a 3-digit mobile country code (MCC) and a 2-digit mobile network code (MNC).
  • IMSI international mobile subscriber identity
  • IMSI is no more than 15 digits, the first 5 digits are PLMN, and the remaining digits are allocated by the network operator according to needs.
  • IMSI is stored in the user's subscriber identity module (SIM) card or universal subscriber identity module (USIM).
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USIM universal subscriber identity module
  • the PLMN in the IMSI is called the home public land mobile network (HPLMN).
  • HPLMN is the PLMN where the user opens an account.
  • User information and the services available to the user are stored in the HPLMN. When a user leaves the coverage of the HPLMN and registers with another PLMN, the user enters the roaming state.
  • the corresponding PLMN of the user when roaming is called the VPLMN.
  • a cell corresponds to one or more PLMNs, and the system information broadcast by the cell may include the identity information of the PLMN corresponding to the cell.
  • the PLMNs corresponding to different cells may be the same or different.
  • At least one means one or more, and more means two or more.
  • At least one of the following or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items.
  • at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a, b and c, where a, b, c can be single or plural.
  • a and/or B can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A and B can be singular or plural.
  • "/" means “or", for example, a/b means a or b.
  • FIG1 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario.
  • the application scenario shown in FIG1 can also be regarded as a schematic diagram of a roaming architecture, for example, a schematic diagram of a roaming architecture based on home routing (home routed, HR).
  • the application scenario includes a visited public land mobile network (VPLMN/vPLMN) of a terminal device and a home public land mobile network (HPLMN/hPLMN) of the terminal device.
  • the visited public land mobile network can also be referred to as a visited (or visited) public land mobile network or a visited network
  • the home public land mobile network can also be referred to as a home public land mobile network or a home network.
  • the vPLMN may also include a network slice selection function (NSSF) network element, a network exposure function (NEF) network element, a network repository function (NRF) network element, a policy control function (PCF) network element, a network slice admission control function (NSACF) network element, an access and mobility management function (AMF) network element, a session management function (SMF) network element and a user plane function (UPF) network element, etc.
  • NSSF network slice selection function
  • NEF network exposure function
  • NRF network repository function
  • PCF policy control function
  • NSACF network slice admission control function
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • SMF session management function
  • UPF user plane function
  • UE accesses the network through (R)AN, and UE can communicate with AMF through N1 interface (N1 for short); (R)AN communicates with AMF through N2 interface (N2 for short); (R)AN communicates with UPF in vPLMN through N3 interface (N3 for short); SMF in vPLMN communicates with UPF in vPLMN through N4 interface (N4 for short); UPFs in vPLMN can communicate with each other through N9 interface (N9 for short).
  • the NSSF, NEF, NRF, PCF, NSACF, AMF and SMF of the vPLMN can interact with each other using service-oriented interfaces.
  • the service-oriented interface provided by NSSF is Nnssf; the service-oriented interface provided by NEF is Nnef; the service-oriented interface provided by NRF is Nnrf; the service-oriented interface provided by PCF is Npcf; the service-oriented interface provided by NSACF is Nnsacf; the service-oriented interface provided by AMF is Namf; and the service-oriented interface provided by SMF is Nsmf.
  • hPLMN may also include unified data management function (UDM) network element, NRF, NEF, NSSF, NSACF, SMF, AMF, authentication service function (AUSF) network element, PCF, application function (AF) network element and network slice-specific authentication and authorization function (NSSAAF) network element, etc.
  • UDM unified data management function
  • the SMF in hPLMN communicates with the UPF in hPLMN through N4; UPFs in hPLMN can communicate with each other through N9; UPF in hPLMN can also communicate with UPF in vPLMN through N9; UPF in hPLMN can also access the data network (DN) through N6 interface (N6 for short).
  • DN data network
  • the UDM, NRF, NEF, NSSF, NSACF, SMF, AMF, AUSF, PCF, AF and NSSAAF of hPLMN can interact with each other using service-oriented interfaces.
  • the service-oriented interface provided by UDM is Nudm; the service-oriented interface provided by NRF is Nnrf; the service-oriented interface provided by NEF is Nnef; the service-oriented interface provided by NSSF is Nnssf; the service-oriented interface provided by NSACF is Nnsacf; the service-oriented interface provided by SMF is Nsmf; the service-oriented interface provided by SMF is Nsmf; the service-oriented interface provided by AMF is Namf; the service-oriented interface provided by AUSF is Nausf; the service-oriented interface provided by PCF is Npcf; the service-oriented interface provided by AF is Naf; and the service-oriented interface provided by NSSAAF is Nnssaaf.
  • AMF is responsible for access and mobility management functions, including user registration, reachability, mobility management, N1/N2 interface signaling transmission, access authentication and authorization, etc.
  • the AMF in the vPLMN can be responsible for the access and mobility management functions in the vPLMN
  • the AMF in the hPLMN can be responsible for the access and mobility management functions in the vPLMN.
  • the AMF in the hPLMN is responsible for access and mobility management functions in the hPLMN.
  • SMF is used to implement session management, including providing session management for UE sessions (such as session establishment, modification, and release), execution of control policies issued by PCF, selection and control of UPF, and allocation of Internet protocol (IP) addresses for UE.
  • session management including providing session management for UE sessions (such as session establishment, modification, and release), execution of control policies issued by PCF, selection and control of UPF, and allocation of Internet protocol (IP) addresses for UE.
  • IP Internet protocol
  • SEPP is responsible for the centralized and secure forwarding of signaling between the network and other networks, such as providing filtering and policies for control plane interface signaling when interacting across PLMNs, and hiding of network element topology within the PLMN.
  • vSEPP is responsible for the centralized and secure forwarding of signaling between vPLMN and other networks (such as hPLMN)
  • hSEPP is responsible for the centralized and secure forwarding of signaling between hPLMN and other networks (such as vPLMN).
  • the NSSF is responsible for determining the network slice used to provide services for the UE.
  • the NSSF in the vPLMN determines the network slice used to provide services for the UE accessing the vPLMN
  • the NSSF in the hPLMN determines the network slice used to provide services for the UE accessing the hPLMN.
  • NEF is responsible for providing the function of opening network data to the outside world.
  • NEF in vPLMN provides the function of developing network data for VPLMN
  • NEF in hPLMN provides the function of developing network data for hPLMN.
  • NSACF is responsible for controlling the number of terminal devices registered for each network slice and the number of sessions corresponding to each network slice.
  • NSACF in vPLMN can be used to control the number of terminal devices registered for network switching in vPLMN and the number of sessions corresponding to each network slice.
  • UDM is responsible for unified data management functions, including user contract management, access authorization, authentication information generation, etc.
  • UDM in hPLMN is responsible for unified data management functions in hPLMN.
  • AUSF is responsible for the authentication service function.
  • AUSF in hPLMN is responsible for the authentication service function in hPLMN.
  • the AF is responsible for providing application layer services.
  • the AF in the hPLMN is responsible for providing application layer services in the hPLMN.
  • NSSAAF is responsible for the authentication and authorization of network slices.
  • NSSAAF in hPLMN is responsible for the authentication and authorization of network slices in hPLMN.
  • E-UTRAN can communicate with MME through the S1-MME interface; E-UTRAN can communicate with SGW through the S1-U interface; MME can communicate with SGW through the S11 interface.
  • UE can communicate with AMF through the N1 interface; NG-RAN can communicate with AMF through the N2 interface; NG-RAN can communicate with UPF through the N3 interface; UPF can communicate with v-SMF through the N4 interface; AMF can communicate with v-SMF through the N11 interface; AMF can communicate with v-PCF through the N15 interface.
  • the 4G EPC of vPLMN and the 5G system can communicate through the N26 interface between MME and AMF.
  • the hPLMN may include a network element integrating UPF and public data network (PDN) gateway (PDNateway, PGW) user plane (PGW-U) functions (as shown in UPF+PGW-U in FIG. 2, where "+" indicates that UPF and PGW-U can be co-located), a network element integrating SMF and PGW control plane (PGW-C) functions (as shown in SMF+PGW-C in FIG. 2, where "+” indicates that SMF and PGW-C can be co-located), h-PCF, and a network element integrating home subscriber server (home subscriber server, HSS) and UDM functions (as shown in HSS+UDM in FIG. 2, where "+” indicates that HSS and UDM can be co-located). Assume) etc.
  • PDN public data network
  • PGW user plane
  • UPF+PGW-U can communicate with SMF+PGW-C through the N4 interface; SMF+PGW-C can communicate with h-PCF through the N7 interface; SMF+PGW-C can communicate with HSS+UDM through the N10 interface.
  • the UPF+PGW-U in the hPLMN can communicate with the SGW in the 4G EPC of the vPLMN through the S8-U interface.
  • the SMF+PGW-C in the hPLMN can communicate with the SGW in the 4G EPC of the vPLMN through the S8-C interface.
  • the HSS+UDM in the hPLMN can communicate with the MME in the 4G EPC of the vPLMN through the S6a interface.
  • the UPF+PGW-U in the hPLMN can communicate with the UPF in the 5G system of the vPLMN through the N9 interface.
  • the SMF+PGW-C in the hPLMN can communicate with the v-SMF in the 5G system of the vPLMN through the N16 interface.
  • the h-PCF in the hPLMN can communicate with the v-PCF in the 5G system of the vPLMN through the N24 interface.
  • the HSS+UDM in the hPLMN can communicate with the AMF in the 5G system of the vPLMN through the N8 interface.
  • MME is responsible for the mobility management of users in the evolved packet system (EPS).
  • EPS evolved packet system
  • the SGW is responsible for the forwarding and routing of mobile anchor points and service packets in the EPS system.
  • PGW is responsible for packet detection, transmission message marking and IP address allocation, QOS strategy and charging strategy in the EPS system.
  • SMF+PGW-C is mainly used to establish sessions in the interoperation between 4G and 5G networks.
  • UPF+PGW-U is mainly used for forwarding user plane messages in the interoperability between 4G and 5G networks.
  • FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are not limited to including only the network elements shown in the figures, but may also include other devices not shown in the figures, which are not listed one by one here.
  • FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are merely exemplary and not limiting.
  • this application will refer to XX network element as XX, for example, SMF network element as SMF. It should be understood that the names of all network elements in this application are only examples, and they may be called other names in future communications, or the network elements involved in this application may be replaced by other entities or devices with the same functions in future communications, and this application does not limit this. A unified explanation is given here, and no further description will be given later.
  • the current roaming scenario only supports the terminal device to maintain service continuity when moving between coverage areas of different network standards in the visited operator network (4G coverage area and 5G coverage area), and does not support the terminal device to maintain service continuity when moving between coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network.
  • the terminal device accesses the visited operator network
  • the terminal device moves from the 5G coverage area of the visited operator network to the 4G coverage area of the home operator network
  • the terminal device will disconnect from the visited operator network during the movement and re-initiate a registration request to the home operator network, which will cause service interruption of the terminal device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method and device to ensure that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network.
  • the communication method and device provided in the present application can be applied to the application scenarios shown in Figure 1 or Figure 2 above without limitation.
  • the present application provides a communication method.
  • the process of the method may include the following steps:
  • Step 301 A first mobility management network element receives a first switching request message from a first access network device, where the first switching request message is used to request switching of a terminal device from a first-standard network in a first operator network to a second-standard network in a second operator network.
  • the first operator network may be a visited operator network of the terminal device, and the second operator network may be a home operator network of the terminal device.
  • the first standard network may be a 5G network
  • the second standard network may be a 4G network.
  • the first standard network may also be a 6G network
  • the second standard network may also be a 5G network, and this application does not limit this.
  • only the first standard network is a 5G network
  • the second standard network is a 4G network as an example for illustration, which is not a limitation of this application.
  • the first mobility management network element belongs to a first-standard network in a first operator network.
  • the first mobility management network element may be a vAMF.
  • network sharing is a way for operators to share mobile network resources.
  • Network sharing enables operators to maximize network deployment and improve overall network quality.
  • the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) system can support different types of network sharing since the standard Rel-5.
  • 3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project
  • different operators can connect to a shared wireless access network, which is also called access network sharing.
  • the shared access network is usually a 5G access network.
  • the first switching request message may include an identifier of the first PLMN currently used by the terminal device. Accordingly, the first mobile management network element determines, based on the first switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network. The method may be: the first mobile management network element determines that the identifier of the first PLMN is a shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network, and the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access the shared access network device of the first operator network.
  • the first PLMN ie, the shared PLMN
  • the PLMN may be different from the PLMN (eg, recorded as a third PLMN) used by subscribers of the first operator network to access the first operator network.
  • the first PLMN may also be the same as the PLMN (for example, recorded as a third PLMN) used by subscribers of the first operator network to access the first operator network.
  • the first switching request message may also include an identifier of a target access network device of the terminal device (e.g., target eNB ID). Further, the first mobility management network element may determine an identifier of a second PLMN to which the target access network device belongs based on the identifier of the target access network device, and the second PLMN corresponds to the second operator network.
  • a target access network device of the terminal device e.g., target eNB ID
  • the first mobility management network element may determine an identifier of a second PLMN to which the target access network device belongs based on the identifier of the target access network device, and the second PLMN corresponds to the second operator network.
  • the first mobility management network element determines that there is an equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN, and then the first mobility management network element determines that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs.
  • the first mobility management network element locally stores the equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN.
  • the second mobility management network element may be hAMF.
  • the first mobility management network element when the first switching request message includes a first switching reason value, and the first switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from a first-standard network to a second-standard network, the first mobility management network element sends a second switching request message to the second mobility management network element.
  • the first switching reason value may be an inter-system handover indication (inter system handover indication), and the inter-system handover indication is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from a 5G network to a 4G network.
  • inter system handover indication inter system handover indication
  • the first mobility management network element may select the second mobility management function network element by the following method, and then send the second handover request message to the second mobility management network element:
  • Method a1 The first mobility management network element determines the second mobility management network element according to the corresponding relationship between the first PLMN currently used by the terminal device configured locally and the second mobility management network element.
  • the first mobile management network element is locally configured with a correspondence between the first PLMN and one or more mobile management network elements belonging to the second operator network.
  • the first mobile management network element can determine the second mobile management network element from the one or more mobile management network elements belonging to the second operator network based on the first PLMN.
  • Method a2 The first mobility management network element obtains the identifier of the second mobility management network element from the network storage network element according to the identifier of the first PLMN, wherein the network storage network element stores the correspondence between the first PLMN and the second mobility management network element. For example, the network storage network element stores the correspondence between the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second mobility management network element.
  • the first mobility management network element Before the first mobility management network element sends the second handover request message to the second mobility management network element, the first mobility management network element may generate the second handover request message according to the first handover request message.
  • the second switching request message may include the identifier of the second PLMN and the information in the first switching request message except the identifier of the first PLMN.
  • the first mobility management function network element replaces the identifier of the first PLMN in the first switching request message with the identifier of the second PLMN to obtain the second switching request message.
  • the second switching request message may include an identifier of the second PLMN, an identifier of the target access network device, and a first switching reason value.
  • the second handover request message may further include first indication information, where the first indication information is used to instruct the second mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the first mobility management network element.
  • the first indication information is used by the second mobile management network element to determine that before receiving the second switching request message, the terminal device sends a message through the shared access network device to request to switch the terminal device from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network.
  • Step 304 The second mobility management network element sends a third handover request message to the third mobility management network element according to the second handover request message.
  • the third switching request message may be used to request switching of the terminal device from a first-standard network in the first operator network to a second-standard network in the second operator network.
  • the third mobility management network element belongs to the second-standard network in the second operator's network.
  • the third mobility management network element may be hMME.
  • the third mobile management network element can interact with other network elements in the second operator network (such as SGW, SMF+PGW-C, UPF+PGW-U, hPCF and other network elements) to complete the establishment of the public data network (public data network, PDN) connection of the second operator network.
  • other network elements in the second operator network such as SGW, SMF+PGW-C, UPF+PGW-U, hPCF and other network elements
  • the third mobility management network element sends a first handover response message to the second mobility management network element, and the first handover response message can be used to respond to the third handover request message.
  • the first switching response message may include one or more of the following information: cause, target to source transparent container, EPS bearer setup list, addresses and tunnel endpoint identifiers (TEIDs).
  • cause target to source transparent container
  • EPS bearer setup list addresses
  • TEIDs tunnel endpoint identifiers
  • the reason may be a reason received by the third mobility management network element from the access network device side (i.e., the target access network device) of the second operator's network, and the reason may be used to indicate access success or access failure.
  • the reason may indicate that the access network device has completed wireless resource preparation, or agrees to switch the terminal device from the source side to the target side, or the reason may indicate that wireless resource preparation is not completed, or the switching of the terminal device is not agreed.
  • the target-side to-source-side transparent container may include some characteristics supported by the target-side access network device, such as a characteristic used by the source side to retrieve the corresponding characteristic on the target side.
  • the EPS bearer setup list refers to the EPS bearer list established by the second operator network side according to the protocol data unit (PDU) session information.
  • PDU session information may specifically be the information carried in the aforementioned handover request message.
  • the addresses and TEIDs may include SGW addresses used to establish an indirect data forwarding path and TEIDs of the user plane data tunnel established on the second-standard network side of the second operator for data forwarding.
  • the second mobility management network element sends a second handover response message to the first mobility management network element, and the second handover response message may be used to respond to the second handover request message.
  • the second handover response message may include the information in the aforementioned first handover response message.
  • the second mobility management network element establishes a connection data forwarding tunnel according to information in the second switching response message, and sends a third switching response message to the first access network device, where the third switching response message is used to respond to the first switching request message.
  • the first access network device sends a switching command to the terminal device to trigger the terminal device to initiate a switch to the target access network device, so that the terminal device is reconfigured to the target access network device.
  • the first access network device forwards the received data to the target access network device through the indirect forwarding path.
  • the terminal device may send a switching completion notification message to the third mobility management network element, where the switching completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that it has switched to the second-standard network in the second operator's network.
  • the handover completion notification message may carry a relocation complete notification indication, which may be used to indicate that the terminal device has successfully switched to the second standard network in the second operator network.
  • the indication notifies the session management network element to release the PDU session in the first operator network.
  • the first mobility management network element may send a request to release the PDU session to the session management network element. After receiving the message of the completion of the PDU session release from the session management network element, the first mobility management network element may send a switching completion confirmation message to the second mobility management network element, and the switching completion confirmation message indicates that the session of the terminal device in the first operator network has been released.
  • the switching completion confirmation message may carry a relocation complete ack indication, which indicates that the switching process has been completed on the first operator network side.
  • the second mobility management network element sends the switching completion confirmation message to the third mobility management network element.
  • the switching request between different standards initiated by the terminal device in the visited operator network can be converted into two steps: switching between the same standard between the home operator network and the visited operator network and switching between different standards of the home operator network. Subsequently, it can be ensured that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between the coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network.
  • Figure 4 shows an example of a communication method, in which the first operator network is the visited operator network of the terminal device, the second operator network is the home operator network of the terminal device, the first standard network is a 5G network, the second standard network is a 4G network, the first access network device is a shared RAN, the first mobile management network element is vAMF, the second mobile management network element is hAMF, and the third mobile management network element is hMME.
  • the vAMF determines whether the UE is allowed to initiate a switch to the 4G network in the home operator network, and forwards the switching request to the hAMF in the home operator network, and the hAMF selects a suitable hMME and forwards data. That is, this example authenticates the switching request based on the vAMF, and the hAMF reconfigures the UE context.
  • the process of this example may include the following steps:
  • Step 401 The shared RAN sends a first handover request message to the vAMF.
  • the first switching request message is used to request to switch the UE from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.
  • the first handover request message may include a target eNB ID and a first handover reason value (e.g., inter system handover indication).
  • a target eNB ID and a first handover reason value may refer to the aforementioned description and will not be described in detail here.
  • the first handover request message may also include an identifier of a first PLMN currently used by the UE.
  • the identifier of the first PLMN can refer to the above description and will not be described in detail here.
  • Step 402 The vAMF determines, based on the first switching request message, that the UE is allowed to switch from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.
  • vAMF determines the method for allowing the UE to switch from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network based on the first switching request message. Please refer to the method for the aforementioned first mobile management network element to determine the method for allowing the terminal device to switch from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network based on the first switching request message. It will not be repeated here.
  • Step 403 vAMF sends a second switching request message to hAMF.
  • the second switching request message is used to request to switch the UE from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.
  • Step 404 hAMF sends a third handover message to hMME according to the second handover request message.
  • the hAMF when the second switching request message includes the first switching reason value, and the first switching reason value is used to indicate that the UE switches from the 5G network to the 4G network, the hAMF sends a third switching request message to the hMME element.
  • Step 407 hAMF sends a second handover response message to vAMF.
  • the third switching response message is used to respond to the first switching request message.
  • Step 412 hAMF forwards the handover completion notification message received from hMME to vAMF according to the first indication information included in the second handover request message.
  • Step 413 vAMF sends a request to release the PDU session to vSMF, and after receiving the PDU session release completion message from vSMF, sends a switching completion confirmation message to hAMF.
  • Step 414 hAMF sends a handover completion confirmation message to hMME.
  • vAMF forwards the handover request message received when the UE switches from the shared 5G network to the 4G network of the home operator to hAMF, and hAMF assists in the interaction of handover signaling between the 5G network and the 4G network when the UE switches from the shared 5G network to the 4G network of the home operator.
  • the UE is guaranteed to maintain service continuity when moving from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.
  • the switching request message 1 is used to request to switch the UE from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.
  • the information carried in the handover request message 1 may include a target eNB ID and a first handover reason value (e.g., inter system handover indication).
  • a target eNB ID and a first handover reason value may refer to the aforementioned description and will not be described in detail here.
  • the handover request message 1 may also include an identifier of the first PLMN currently used by the UE.
  • the identifier of the first PLMN can refer to the above description and will not be described again here.
  • the handover request message 1 may also include a source to target transparent container.
  • the source to target transparent container may include information about the source side shared RAN, such as: data flow (QoS flow) or radio bearer information that needs to be forwarded.
  • the source to target transparent container will be transparently transmitted to the target RAN side, and is used by the target RAN to allocate or configure the target side radio bearer resources according to the information on the source side.
  • Step 502 The vAMF determines, based on the handover request message 1, that the UE is allowed to switch from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 5G network of the home operator network.
  • the 4G network of the commercial network The 4G network of the commercial network.
  • the method in which vAMF determines, based on the switching request message 1, that the UE is allowed to switch from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network is similar to the method in which the aforementioned first mobile management network element determines, based on the first switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network.
  • the aforementioned first mobile management network element determines, based on the first switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network.
  • Step 503 vAMF generates a switching request message 2 (such as a redirection request relocation request) based on the switching request message 1, encapsulates the switching request message 2 in an N14 container, and sends the N14 message 1 to the hAMF.
  • a switching request message 2 such as a redirection request relocation request
  • the N14 message 1 includes the N14 container.
  • the switching request message 2 may include the target eNB ID, the identifier of the second PLMN and the first switching reason value.
  • the handover request message 2 may also include source to target transparent container and/or MME UE context.
  • the N14 message 1 may also include a target ID and indication information 1 (such as a forward indication (forward_indication)).
  • a target ID and indication information 1 such as a forward indication (forward_indication)
  • indication information 1 can indicate the specific action of hAMF after receiving the N14 message.
  • indication information 1 can instruct hAMF to select hMME according to target ID and forward the data in N14 container to the selected hMME.
  • the indication information 1 may also indicate that when hAMF receives the message sent by hMME, it encapsulates it into the N14 container and forwards it to vAMF.
  • Step 504 After hAMF receives the N14 message sent by vAMF, it selects hMME according to the N14 message and forwards the switching request message 2 in the N14 container to hMME.
  • hAMF may select hMME based on the target eNB ID and forward_indication in N14 message 1.
  • Step 505 hMME completes the home operator network handover preparation.
  • hMME interacts with other network elements in the home operator network (such as SGW, SMF+PGW-C, UPF+PGW-U, HPCF, etc.) to complete the establishment of PDN connection on the home operator network side.
  • other network elements in the home operator network such as SGW, SMF+PGW-C, UPF+PGW-U, HPCF, etc.
  • Step 506 hMME sends a handover response message 1 to hAMF.
  • the handover response message 1 is used to respond to the handover request message 2 sent by hAMF.
  • Step 507 hAMF encapsulates the handover response message 1 received from hMME into an N14 container, and sends an N14 message 2 to vAMF.
  • the N14 message 2 includes the N14 container.
  • hAMF encapsulates the switching response message 1 received from hMME into an N14 container according to the indication information 1 in the N14 message 1, and sends an N14 message 2 to vAMF.
  • Step 508 The vAMF parses the N14 message 2, obtains the switching response message 1, establishes an indirect data forwarding tunnel according to the switching response message 1, and sends the switching response message 2 to the shared RAN.
  • the switching response message 2 is used to respond to the switching request message 1.
  • the shared RAN forwards the received downlink data to the target eNB through the indirect data forwarding path.
  • the switching completion notification message is used to notify the UE that it has switched to the 4G network in the home operator's network.
  • Step 511 hMME sends a handover completion notification message to hAMF.
  • Step 512 hAMF encapsulates the received handover completion notification message of hMME in an N14 container according to indication information 1 in N14 message 1, and sends N14 message 3 to vAMF, where N14 message 3 includes the N14 container.
  • Step 513 After vAMF parses N14 message 3 to obtain the handover completion notification message, it sends a request to release the PDU session to vSMF. After receiving the PDU session release completion message from vSMF, vAMF generates a handover completion confirmation message, encapsulates the handover completion confirmation message into an N14 container, and sends N14 message 4 to hAMF, which includes the N14 container.
  • the handover completion confirmation message may indicate that the session of the UE in the visited operator network has been released.
  • the switching completion confirmation message can carry a redirection completion confirmation indication (relocation complete ack indication), which indicates that the switching process has been completed on the visited operator network side.
  • redirection completion confirmation indication (relocation complete ack indication)
  • Step 514 hAMF parses the N14 container in N14 message 4, and forwards the handover completion confirmation message in the N14 container to hMME.
  • vAMF converts the received switching request message 1 of the shared RAN into a switching request message 2 that needs to be sent to hMME and encapsulates it in the N14 container, and at the same time provides hAMF with an indication of selecting hMME.
  • hAMF directly forwards the message in the N14 container to hMME, and encapsulates the received reply message of hMME in the N14 container and forwards it to vAMF.
  • hAMF only acts as an agent for transparent transmission of messages between vAMF and hMME.
  • the above method ensures that the UE maintains service continuity when moving from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network in a scenario where direct communication is not possible between the shared 5G network and the home operator's 4G network.
  • the hAMF determines whether the UE is allowed to make such a switch and interacts with the hMME to complete the UE's switch from the shared RAN to the home operator's 4G network.
  • the process of this example may include the following steps:
  • Step 601 Sharing the handover request message 1 sent by the RAN to the vAMF.
  • the switching request message 1 is used to request to switch the UE from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.
  • the information carried in the handover request message 1 may include a target eNB ID and a first handover reason value (e.g., inter system handover indication).
  • a target eNB ID and a first handover reason value may refer to the aforementioned description and will not be described in detail here.
  • the handover request message 1 may also include an identifier of the first PLMN currently used by the UE (e.g., selected PLMN).
  • the identifier of the first PLMN can be found in the above description and will not be repeated here.
  • Step 602 The vAMF encapsulates the switching request message 1 into the N14 container, and sends the N14 message 1 to the hAMF corresponding to the pre-configured first PLMN identifier.
  • the N14 message 1 includes the N14 container.
  • the vAMF preconfigures the correspondence between the shared PLMN identifier and the AMF. For example, if the shared PLMN identifier is 46022, it corresponds to hAMF1; if the shared PLMN identifier is 46023, it corresponds to hAMF2.
  • the N14 message 1 is sent to the hAMF corresponding to the pre-configured first PLMN identifier.
  • the method for vAMF to determine that the first PLMN identifier is a shared PLMN identifier of the home operator network can refer to the relevant method involved in the embodiment shown in Figure 3, and will not be described in detail here.
  • Step 603 hAMF parses N14 message 1, obtains the switching request message 1 in the N14 container, and determines, based on the switching request message 1, that the UE is allowed to switch from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.
  • the method in which hAMF determines, based on the switching request message 1, that the UE is allowed to switch from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network is similar to the method in which the first mobile management network element determines, based on the first switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network in the embodiment shown in Figure 3.
  • the first mobile management network element determines, based on the first switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network in the embodiment shown in Figure 3.
  • Step 604 The vAMF generates a handover request message 2 according to the handover request message 1, and sends the handover request message 2 to the hMME.
  • hAMF can find the corresponding hMME based on the target eNB ID.
  • hAMF may request hSMF+PGW-C to obtain the UE EPS PDN connection information corresponding to the UE's PDU session, and generate a switching request message 2 based on the information in the switching request message 1 and the obtained UE EPS PDN connection information.
  • Step 605 hMME completes the home operator network handover preparation.
  • hMME interacts with other network elements in the home operator network (such as SGW, SMF+PGW-C, UPF+PGW-U, HPCF, etc.) to complete the establishment of PDN connection on the home operator network side.
  • other network elements in the home operator network such as SGW, SMF+PGW-C, UPF+PGW-U, HPCF, etc.
  • Step 606 hMME sends a handover response message 1 to hAMF.
  • the switching response message 1 is used to respond to the switching request message 2 sent by the hAMF.
  • Step 607 After receiving the handover response message 1, hAMF generates a handover command, which can instruct the UE to handover to the target eNB. hAMF encapsulates the handover command in an N14 container and sends a handover response message 2 to vAMF.
  • the switching response message 2 includes an N14 container.
  • hAMF determines whether a data forwarding tunnel needs to be established based on the received switching response message 1. If necessary, hAMF triggers hSMF+PGW-C to communicate with the visited operator network side based on the information of the data forwarding tunnel in the received switching response message 1. A data forwarding tunnel is established between the two networks, and the information of the data forwarding tunnel of the visited operator network is included in the generated handover command together with other information in the handover response message 1.
  • the switching response message 1 includes the information of the data forwarding tunnel, it means that the data forwarding tunnel needs to be established, otherwise it does not need to be established.
  • Step 608 The vAMF parses the handover response message 2 and forwards the handover command in the N14 container to the shared RAN.
  • Step 609 The shared RAN sends a handover command to the UE.
  • the shared RAN forwards the received downlink data to the target eNB through the indirect data forwarding path.
  • Step 610 After the UE switches to the target eNB in the home operator's network, it sends a switching completion notification message to the hMME.
  • the switching completion notification message is used to notify the UE that it has switched to the 4G network in the home operator's network.
  • Step 611 hMME sends a handover completion notification message to hAMF.
  • Step 612 hAMF confirms that the handover has been completed according to the handover completion notification message and needs to release the session on the visited operator network side. hAMF releases the PDU session on the vSMF side through hSMF+PGW-C. Then, hAMF sends N14 message 2 to vAMF, and N14 message 2 contains N14 container, which contains the handover completion notification message.
  • Step 613 vAMF sends N14 message 3 to hAMF.
  • N14 message 3 includes an N14 container, and the N14 container includes a switching completion confirmation message 1.
  • the handover completion confirmation message 1 may indicate that the session of the UE in the visited operator network has been released.
  • Step 614 hAMF generates a switching completion confirmation message 2 according to the result information of hSMF+PGW-C releasing the vSMF side session and the switching completion confirmation message 1 returned by VAMF, and sends the switching completion confirmation message 2 to hMME.
  • the above describes a method for ensuring that the service continuity is maintained when the terminal device moves from the first standard network of the visited operator network to the second standard network of the home operator network, such as a method for ensuring that the service continuity is maintained when the UE moves from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.
  • the following describes a method for ensuring that the service continuity is maintained when the UE moves from the second standard network of the home operator network to the first standard network of the visited operator network, such as a method for ensuring that the service continuity is maintained when the UE moves from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network.
  • FIG7 shows a communication method, which can ensure that the terminal device maintains service continuity when it moves from the second standard network of the home operator network to the first standard network of the visited operator network.
  • the process of the method may include the following steps:
  • Step 701 The second mobility management network element receives a first switching request message from a third mobility management network element, where the first switching request message is used to request switching of a terminal device from a second-standard network in a second operator network to a first-standard network in a first operator network.
  • the second mobility management network element belongs to a first-standard network in the second operator network; and the third mobility management network element belongs to a second-standard network in the second operator network.
  • the second mobility management network element may be hAMF.
  • the third mobility management network element may be hMME.
  • the first operator network may be a visited operator network of the terminal device, and the second operator network may be a home operator network of the terminal device.
  • the first-standard network may be a 5G network
  • the second-standard network may be a 4G network.
  • the third mobility management network element after the third mobility management network element receives a message from the source access network device requesting to switch the terminal device from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network, it sends a first switching request message to the second mobility management network element.
  • the source access network device is the current access network device of the terminal device, and the source access network device is used for the terminal device to access the first-standard network of the second operator.
  • Step 702 The second mobility management network element determines, based on the first switching request message, that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device, and the target access network device is used for the terminal device to access the first operator's network.
  • the first switching request message includes an identifier of the target access network device (e.g., target gNB ID).
  • the second mobility management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device according to the first switching request message, and the method may be: the second mobility management network element determines the identifier of the first PLMN to which the target access network device belongs according to the identifier of the target access network device, and the first PLMN corresponds to the first operator network; if the identifier of the first PLMN corresponds to the shared PLMN identifier, the second mobility management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device; wherein the shared PLMN identifier is used for the first Users of the second operator network access the shared access network device of the first operator network.
  • the second mobile management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device. For example, it can be: the second mobile management network element confirms through querying HSS/UDM or local configuration that there is a sharing agreement between the first operator network corresponding to the identifier of the first PLMN and the second operator network, that is, the device of the second operator network can access the shared device of the first operator network through the shared PLMN allocated by the first operator network. Then the second mobile management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device.
  • the shared PLMN identifier when the terminal device accesses the shared access network device, the shared PLMN identifier is used, that is, the shared PLMN identifier can be understood as the identifier of the PLMN used by the terminal device to access the shared access network device. It can also be understood as the PLMN identifier used when a device in a non-operator network (such as a terminal device in the second operator network) accesses a device in the operator network (such as an access network device in the first operator network).
  • Step 703 The second mobility management network element sends a second handover request message to the first mobility management network element according to the first handover request message.
  • the second switching request message may be used to request switching of the terminal device from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network.
  • the first mobility management network element belongs to a first-standard network in a first operator network.
  • the first mobility management network element may be a vAMF.
  • the first switching request message may also include one or more of the following information: MME UE context or source to target transparent container.
  • the source to target transparent container can refer to the related description mentioned above.
  • the MME UE context may contain international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI), mobile equipment identity (ME ID), UE security context (UE security context), UE network capability (UE network capability), aggregated maximum bit rate (AMBR), selected CN operator ID, access point name (APN) restriction, Serving GW address and TEID for control signalling, or EPS bearer context(s).
  • IMSI international mobile subscriber identity
  • ME ID mobile equipment identity
  • UE security context UE security context
  • UE network capability UE network capability
  • ABR aggregated maximum bit rate
  • selected CN operator ID CN operator ID
  • APN access point name
  • Serving GW address and TEID for control signalling
  • the second mobility management network element Before the second mobility management network element sends the second handover request message to the first mobility management network element, the second mobility management network element may generate a second handover request message according to the first handover request message.
  • the second switching request message may include the shared PLMN identifier and the information included in the first switching request message.
  • the second mobility management network element may convert the EPS bearer context into a 5GS mobility management (mobility management, MM) context according to the MME UE context.
  • the second mobility management network element may request the hNRF to obtain the address or fully qualified domain name (FQDN) at the N11 or N16 interface of the SMF+PGW-C according to the S5 or S8 interface address and FQDN of the SMF+PGW-C included in the EPS PDN connection in the EPS bearer context, and include it in the 5GS MM context.
  • the 5GS MM context included in the second handover request message no longer includes the EPS bearer context.
  • the second handover request message may further include second indication information, where the second indication information is used to instruct the first mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the second mobility management network element.
  • the second mobility management network element may select the first mobility management function network element by the following method, and then send the second handover request message to the first mobility management network element:
  • Method b1 The second mobility management network element is based on the locally configured first mobility management network element corresponding to the target access network device.
  • the second mobility management network element is configured with a list of mobility management network elements supporting shared access network devices, and the second mobility management network element can select a first mobility management network element corresponding to the target access network device and belonging to the second operator network.
  • Method b2 The second mobility management network element queries the network storage network element for the identifier of the first mobility management network element.
  • the first mobile management network element registers its own capability information of supporting shared access network devices and information of shared access network devices supported by the first mobile management network element with the network storage network element.
  • the information of shared access network devices supported by the first mobile management network element may include the corresponding shared PLMN identifier of the shared access network device and the identifier of the shared access network device corresponding to the shared PLMN identifier; or, may include a list of identifiers of the shared access network device and the shared PLMN corresponding to the list of identifiers of the shared access network device.
  • the second mobility management network element may query the network storage network element for the first mobility management network element that supports the target access network device based on the identifier of the target access network device.
  • Step 704 The first mobility management network element determines, based on the second switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second-standard network in the second operator's network to the first-standard network in the first operator's network.
  • the first mobile management network element determines, based on the second switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network.
  • the method may be: when there is an equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the second PLMN currently used by the terminal device and the shared PLMN identifier, the first mobile management network element determines that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network.
  • the second PLMN may be a PLMN used by subscribers of the second operator network to access the second operator network.
  • an equivalent correspondence between the shared PLMN identifier and the identifier of the second PLMN is configured in the first mobility management network element.
  • Step 705 The first mobility management network element sends a session establishment request message to the first session management network element according to the second handover request message.
  • the first session management network element belongs to a first-standard network in a first operator network.
  • the first session management network element may be a vSMF.
  • the session establishment request message may include 5GS MM context, etc.
  • the first session management network element can interact with the user plane network element and policy control network element in the first operator network based on the 5GS MM context to complete the establishment of the PDN session on the first operator network side, and the first session management network element interacts with hSMF+PGW-C, hUPF, etc. to complete the establishment of the session on the second operator network side.
  • the first session management network element sends a session establishment response message to the first mobility management network element, and the session establishment response message is used to respond to the session establishment request message.
  • the first mobility management network element After receiving the session establishment response message, the first mobility management network element sends a first handover response message to the second mobility management network element, where the first handover response message is used to respond to the second handover request message.
  • the first mobility management network element After receiving the session establishment response message, the first mobility management network element confirms the information of the PDU session established by the first session management network element and the corresponding EPS bearer setup list, and the first mobility management network element generates a first switching response message.
  • the first switching response message may include a cause, a target to source transparent container, an EPS bearer setup List, and a target AMF ID.
  • the cause and the target to source transparent container please refer to the above-mentioned related description.
  • the second mobile management network element may record the target AMF ID, and upon receiving a switching completion message sent by the AMF corresponding to the target AMF ID, send a second switching response message to the third mobile management network element.
  • the third mobility management network element may request the SGW to establish a downlink data forwarding path.
  • the third mobility management network element sends a switching command to the terminal device through the source access network device to trigger the terminal device to initiate a switching to the target access network device, so that the terminal device is reconfigured to the target access network device.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device switches to the target access network device, the terminal device sends a switching completion notification message to the first mobile management network element through the shared access network device (i.e., the target access network device), and the switching completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that it has switched to the first-standard network in the first operator network; the first mobile management network element sends the switching completion notification message to the second mobile management network element according to the second indication information included in the second switching request message.
  • the shared access network device i.e., the target access network device
  • the handover completion notification message may include the identifier of the first mobility management network element.
  • the second mobility management network element may compare the identifier of the first mobility management network element with the stored target AMF ID, and if they are the same, send a redirection handover completion notification message to the third mobility management network element.
  • the redirection handover completion notification message may include a redirection complete notification indication (relocation complete notification indication), which can be used to indicate that the terminal device has successfully switched.
  • a default hAMF is configured on the hMME.
  • the hMME receives the switching request message 1 from the eNB, the hMME confirms that the UE switches from the 4G network to the 5G network according to the second switching reason value, and the PLMN ID corresponding to the target gNB ID does not belong to the PLMN ID corresponding to the home operator network, and directly forwards the switching request message 1 to the default configured hAMF.
  • Step 810 hAMF records the target AMF ID, and upon receiving the switching completion message sent by the AMF corresponding to the target AMF ID, it sends a switching response message 2 to hMME.
  • Step 813 After the UE switches to the target access network device, the UE sends a switching completion notification message to the vAMF through the shared RAN (i.e., the target access network device).
  • the switching completion notification message is used to notify the UE that it has switched to the 5G network in the visited operator network.
  • Step 814 vAMF sends the switching completion notification message to hAMF according to the second indication information included in the switching request message 2.
  • the vAMF ID may be included in the switch completion notification message.
  • Step 815 After hAMF receives the switching completion notification message sent by vAMF, it compares the vAMF ID with the stored target AMF ID. If they are the same, it sends a switching completion notification message to hMME.
  • Step 816 After receiving the handover completion notification message sent by hAMF, hMME releases EPS-related bearers. Then, hMME sends a handover completion confirmation message to hAMF.
  • Step 817 hAMF forwards the switching completion confirmation message to vAMF.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method shown in Figures 9 and 10, which can ensure that the UE maintains service continuity when moving from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network.
  • the hAMF assists in forwarding the handover request received by the hMME to the vAMF, and the vAMF determines that the UE is allowed to initiate a handover to the 5G network of the visited operator network, and forwards the handover preparation completion message and confirmation message to the hMME through the hAMF, completing the handover of the UE from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network.
  • the process of this example may include the following steps:
  • Step 901 the eNB sends a handover request message 1 to the hMME.
  • the switching request message 1 is used to request to switch the UE from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network.
  • the handover request message 1 contains the target gNB ID, the second handover reason value, MME UE context and source to target transparent container.
  • Step 902 hMME sends a handover request message 1 to hAMF.
  • a default hAMF is configured on the hMME.
  • the hMME receives the switching request message 1 from the eNB, the hMME confirms that the UE switches from the 4G network to the 5G network according to the second switching reason value, and the PLMN ID corresponding to the target gNB ID does not belong to the PLMN ID corresponding to the home operator network, and directly forwards the switching request message 1 to the default configured hAMF.
  • Step 903 hAMF encapsulates the switching request message 1 into the N14 container, and sends a redirected switching request message (such as an N14 message) to the vAMF.
  • the redirected switching request message includes the N14 container.
  • hAMF determines that the UE switches from 4G to 5G according to the second switching reason value in the switching request message 1, and determines that the switching request message 1 needs to be forwarded to vAMF.
  • vAMF is the AMF corresponding to the PLMN ID corresponding to the target gNB ID.
  • hAMF is configured with the correspondence between the PLMN ID of the visited operator network and vAMF.
  • the redirection switching request message includes a forward indication (forward_indication), which is used to instruct the vAMF to forward the switching completion notification message to the hAMF after receiving it.
  • forward_indication a forward indication
  • vAMF determines the identifier of the first PLMN corresponding to the target gNB ID according to the target gNB ID in the handover request message 1. vAMF also queries the subscription information of the UE from hUDM, and determines the corresponding shared PLMN ID used by the UE according to the subscription information obtained from hUDM. If the identifier of the first PLMN corresponds to the shared PLMN ID, vAMF determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is the shared RAN. Optionally, vAMF confirms that it supports the UE to switch from the 4G network of the home operator to the 5G network of the visited operator by querying the local configuration.
  • the vAMF is configured with the correspondence between the shared PLMN ID and the PLMN ID of the home operator network.
  • the vAMF determines that the shared PLMN and the PLMN of the home operator network are equivalent PLMNs through the correspondence between the shared PLMN ID and the PLMN ID of the home operator network, thereby determining that the UE is allowed to switch from the 4G network in the home operator network to the 5G network in the visited operator network.
  • vAMF sends a request for 5GS context to hAMF (proxy), which carries the MME UE context.
  • hAMF (proxy) converts EPS context into 5GS MM context according to the MME UE context.
  • hAMF can request hNRF to obtain the address or FQDN of the N11 or N16 interface of SMF+PGW-C according to the S5 or S8 interface address and FQDN of SMF+PGW-C included in the EPS PDN connection in the EPS context, and include it in the 5GS MM context.
  • Step 905 vAMF sends a session establishment request message to vSMF.
  • the session establishment request message can carry 5GS MM context.
  • Step 906 vSMF completes the preparation for switching to the visited operator network.
  • vSMF interacts with network elements on the visited operator network side, such as vUPF and vPCF, to complete the establishment of the PDN session on the visited operator network side, and vSMF interacts with hSMF+PGW-C, hUPF, etc. to complete the establishment of the session on the home operator side.
  • network elements on the visited operator network side such as vUPF and vPCF
  • vSMF interacts with hSMF+PGW-C, hUPF, etc. to complete the establishment of the session on the home operator side.
  • Step 907 vSMF sends a session establishment response message to vAMF.
  • Step 908 vAMF generates a switching response message 1, encapsulates the switching response message 1 in an N14 container, and sends the N14 message 1 to the hAMF, where the N14 message 1 includes the N14 container.
  • the switching response message 1 is used to respond to the switching request message 1 .
  • vAMF After receiving the session establishment response message, vAMF confirms the information of the PDU session established by vSMF and the corresponding EPS bearer setup list, and vAMF generates a switching response message 1.
  • the switching response message 1 may include a cause, a target to source transparent container, an EPS bearer setup List, and a target AMF ID.
  • Step 909 hAMF parses N14 message 1, records the target AMF ID in the switching response message 1, and forwards the switching response message 1 to hMME.
  • Step 910 hMME sends a handover command to the eNB to trigger the UE to handover to the target access network device.
  • Step 911 the eNB sends a handover command to the UE, and the UE initiates a handover process to the shared RAN.
  • Step 912 After the UE switches to the target access network device, the UE sends a switching completion notification message to the vAMF through the shared RAN (ie, the target access network device).
  • the switching completion notification message is used to notify the UE that it has switched to the 5G network in the visited operator's network.
  • Step 913 vAMF encapsulates the switching completion notification message in an N14 container according to the forwarding indication included in the redirected switching request message, and sends N14 message 2 to hAMF.
  • the N14 message 2 includes the N14 container.
  • Step 914 After hAMF parses N14 message 2 to obtain the switching completion notification message, it compares the vAMF ID with the stored target AMF ID. If they are the same, it sends a switching completion notification message to hMME.
  • Step 915 After receiving the handover completion notification message sent by hAMF, hMME releases EPS-related bearers. Then, hMME sends a handover completion confirmation message to hAMF.
  • Step 916 hAMF encapsulates the handover completion confirmation message sent by hMME in an N14 container, and sends N14 message 3 to vAMF, where N14 message 3 includes the N14 container.
  • hAMF uses vAMF as a proxy to pass messages between the shared RAN and hAMF.
  • hAMF selects vSMF according to the message instruction, and forwards the PDU session creation message generated by hAMF to the selected vSMF.
  • hAMF establishes a connection with vSMF through vAMF to establish a PDU session on the visited operator network side.
  • the process of this example may include the following steps:
  • Step 1001 the eNB sends a handover request message 1 to the hMME.
  • the switching request message 1 is used to request to switch the UE from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network.
  • the handover request message 1 contains the target gNB ID, the second handover reason value, MME UE context and source to target transparent container.
  • Step 1002 hMME sends a handover request message 1 to hAMF.
  • a default hAMF is configured on the hMME.
  • the hMME receives the switching request message 1 from the eNB, the hMME confirms that the UE switches from the 4G network to the 5G network according to the second switching reason value, and the PLMN ID corresponding to the target gNB ID does not belong to the PLMN ID corresponding to the home operator network, and directly forwards the switching request message 1 to the default configured hAMF.
  • Step 1003 hAMF generates a session establishment request message according to the switching request message 1, encapsulates the session establishment request message in an N14 container, and sends the N14 message 1 to the vAMF.
  • the N14 message 1 includes the N14 container.
  • hAMF determines that the UE switches from the 4G network to the 5G network based on the second switching reason value in the switching request message 1, and then determines the PLMN ID corresponding to the target gNB ID based on the target gNB ID in the switching request message 1, and selects the vAMF corresponding to the PLMN ID corresponding to the target gNB ID based on the correspondence between the PLMN ID of the visited operator network configured on the hAMF and the vAMF.
  • hAMF converts EPS context into 5GS MM context according to MME UE context in handover request message 1.
  • hAMF can request hNRF to obtain the address or FQDN at the N11 or N16 interface of SMF+PGW-C according to the S5 or S8 interface address and FQDN of SMF+PGW-C included in the EPS PDN connection in EPS context, and include it in 5GS MM context.
  • hAMF requests the ID of v-SMF according to the target gNB ID through hNRF and vNRF.
  • the session establishment request message can carry 5GS MM context.
  • the N14 message 1 may also include the ID of the v-SMF and a forwarding indication (forward_indication), where the forwarding indication is used to instruct the vAMF to forward the received message to the v-SMF or hAMF.
  • forward_indication a forwarding indication used to instruct the vAMF to forward the received message to the v-SMF or hAMF.
  • Step 1004 vAMF parses the N14 message, and sends the session establishment request message in the N14 container to the v-SMF corresponding to the v-SMF ID according to the forwarding instruction in the N14 message 1.
  • Step 1005 vSMF completes the preparation for switching to the visited operator network.
  • Step 1006 vSMF sends a session establishment response message to vAMF.
  • the session establishment response message can be a PDU session context response (Nsmf_PDUSession_CreateSMContext response).
  • Step 1007 After receiving the session establishment response message sent by vSMF, vAMF encapsulates the session establishment response message into an N14 container, and sends an N14 message 2 to hAMF according to the forwarding instruction in the N14 message 1, and N14 message 2 includes the N14 container.
  • Step 1008 After parsing N14 message 2, hAMF obtains a session establishment response message, interacts with network elements on the visited operator network side (such as v-SMF and vUPF) and network elements on the home operator network side (such as hSMF+PGW-C and hUPF), completes the switching preparation for 5GS, and sends a switching response message to hMME.
  • the switching response message is used to respond to the switching request message 1.
  • Step 1009 hMME sends a handover command to the eNB to trigger the UE to switch to the target access network device to initiate handover.
  • Step 1010 the eNB sends a handover command to the UE, and the UE initiates a handover process to the shared RAN.
  • Step 1011 After the UE switches to the target access network device, the UE sends a switching completion notification message to the vAMF through the shared RAN (i.e., the target access network device).
  • the switching completion notification message is used to notify the UE that it has switched to the 5G network in the visited operator network.
  • Step 1012 vAMF encapsulates the switching completion notification message in an N14 container and sends an N14 message 3 to hAMF, where the N14 message 3 includes the N14 container.
  • Step 1013 After hAMF parses N14 message 3 to obtain a handover completion notification message, it sends a handover completion notification message to hMME.
  • Step 1014 After receiving the handover completion notification message sent by the hAMF, the hMME releases the EPS-related bearers. After that, the hMME sends a handover completion confirmation message to the hAMF.
  • Step 1015 hAMF encapsulates the handover completion confirmation message sent by hMME in an N14 container, and sends N14 message 4 to vAMF, where N14 message 4 includes the N14 container.
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide a communication device, as shown in FIG11 , the communication device 1100 may include a transceiver unit 1101 and a processing unit 1102.
  • the transceiver unit 1101 is used for the communication device 1100 to receive messages (information or data) or send messages (information or data), and the processing unit 1102 is used to control and manage the actions of the communication device 1100.
  • the processing unit 1102 may also control the steps performed by the transceiver unit 1101.
  • the communication device 1100 may specifically be the first mobile management network element in the above-mentioned embodiment, the processor of the first mobile management network element, or a chip, or a chip system, or a functional module, etc.; or, the communication device 1100 may specifically be the second mobile management network element in the above-mentioned embodiment, the processor of the second mobile management network element, or a chip, or a chip system, or a functional module, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 1101 can be used to receive a first switching request message from the first access network device, and the first switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network;
  • the first access network device is a shared access network device, and the terminal device accesses the first standard network in the first operator network through the first access network device;
  • the processing unit 1102 can be used to determine, according to the first switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network;
  • the transceiver unit 1101 can also be used to send a second switching request message to the second mobility management network element, and the second switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network; wherein the first mobility management network element
  • the first switching request message includes an identifier of the first PLMN currently used by the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1102 determines that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network based on the first switching request message, it can be used to: determine that the identifier of the first PLMN is a shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network, and the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access a shared access network device of the first operator network.
  • the first switching request message also includes an identifier of a target access network device of the terminal device; the processing unit 1102 can also be used to: determine, based on the identifier of the target access network device, an identifier of a second PLMN to which the target access network device belongs, the second PLMN corresponding to the second operator network; when the processing unit 1102 determines that the identifier of the first PLMN is a shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network, it can be used to: determine, based on the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN, that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs.
  • the processing unit 1102 determines that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs according to the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN, it can be used to: determine that there is an equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN.
  • the processing unit 1102 may also be configured to: generate the second switching request message according to the first switching request message before the transceiver unit 1101 sends the second switching request message to the second mobility management network element.
  • the processing unit 1102 when generating the second switching request message based on the first switching request message, can be used to: generate the second switching request message, the second switching request message including the identifier of the second PLMN and information in the first switching request message except the identifier of the first PLMN.
  • the transceiver unit 1101 when the transceiver unit 1101 sends a second switching request message to a second mobile management network element, it can be used to: when the first switching request message includes a first switching reason value, and the first switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the first standard network to the second standard network, send the second switching request message to the second mobile management network element.
  • the second switching request message includes the first switching reason value.
  • the second handover request message includes first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to instruct the second mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the first mobility management network element.
  • the transceiver unit 1101 can be used to receive a second switching request message from the first mobility management network element, the second switching request message is used to request to switch the terminal device from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network; and according to the second switching request message, send a third switching request message to the third mobility management network element, the third switching request message is used to request to switch the terminal device from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network; wherein the first mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network, the second mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the second operator network, and the third mobility management network element belongs to the second standard network in the second operator network.
  • the processing unit 1102 can be used to control the operation of the transceiver unit 1101.
  • the transceiver unit 1101 when the transceiver unit 1101 sends the third switching request message to the third mobile management network element according to the second switching request message, it can be used to: when the second switching request message includes a first switching reason value, and the first switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the first-standard network to the second-standard network, send the third switching request message to the third mobile management network element.
  • the second switching request message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the second mobile management network element to send the received switching completion notification message to the first mobile management network element;
  • the transceiver unit 1101 can also be used to: receive a switching completion notification message from the third mobile management network element, and the switching completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that it has switched to the second-standard network in the second operator network; according to the first indication information, send the switching completion notification message to the first mobile management network element.
  • the second switching request message includes an identifier of a second PLMN, and the identifier of the second PLMN is used to identify the PLMN to which the target access network device of the terminal device belongs.
  • the transceiver unit 1101 can be used to receive a first switching request message from the third mobility management network element, and the first switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network;
  • the processing unit 1102 can be used to determine, according to the first switching request message, that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device, and the target access network device is used for the terminal device to access the first operator network;
  • the transceiver unit 1101 can also be used to send a second switching request message to the first mobility management network element according to the first switching request message, and the second switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network; wherein the first mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network, the second mobility management network element belongs to
  • the first switching request message includes an identifier of the target access network device; when the processing unit 1102 determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device based on the first switching request message, it can be used to: determine, based on the identifier of the target access network device, an identifier of the first PLMN to which the target access network device belongs, the first PLMN corresponding to the first operator network; if the identifier of the first PLMN corresponds to a shared PLMN identifier, determine that the target access network device of the terminal device is the shared access network device; wherein the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access the shared access network device of the first operator network.
  • the transceiver unit 1101 when the transceiver unit 1101 sends a second switching request message to the first mobile management network element according to the first switching request message, it can be used to: when the first switching request message includes a second switching reason value, and the second switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the second-standard network to the first-standard network, send the second switching request message to the first mobile management network element.
  • the processing unit 1102 can also be used to: generate the second switching request message according to the first switching request message before the transceiver unit 1101 sends the second switching request message to the first mobile management network element, wherein the second switching request message includes the shared PLMN identifier and the information included in the first switching request message.
  • the second handover request message includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to instruct the first mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the second mobility management network element.
  • the transceiver unit 1101 can be used to receive a second switching request message from the second mobility management network element, and the second switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network;
  • the processing unit 1102 can be used to determine, according to the second switching request message, whether the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network.
  • the second-standard network is switched to the first-standard network in the first operator network; the transceiver unit 1101 can also be used to send a session establishment request message to the first session management network element according to the second switching request message; wherein the first mobile management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the first operator network, the second mobile management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the second operator network, and the first session management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the first operator network.
  • the second switching request message includes a shared PLMN identifier, and the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access the shared access network device of the first operator network; when the processing unit 1102 determines, based on the second switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network, it can be used to: when there is an equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the second PLMN currently used by the terminal device and the shared PLMN identifier, determine that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network.
  • the second switching request message includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to instruct the first mobile management network element to forward the received switching completion notification message to the second mobile management network element;
  • the transceiver unit 1101 can also be used to: receive a switching completion notification message, and the switching completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that it has switched to the first standard network in the first operator network; according to the second indication information, send the switching completion notification message to the second mobile management network element.
  • each functional unit in the embodiments of the present application may be integrated into a processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) or a processor (processor) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code.
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide a communication device.
  • the communication device 1200 may include a memory 1201 and a processor 1202 .
  • the processor 1202 may be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP) or a combination of a CPU and a NP.
  • the processor 1202 may further include a hardware chip.
  • the hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD) or a combination thereof.
  • the PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a generic array logic (GAL) or any combination thereof.
  • the memory 1201 and the processor 1202 are interconnected.
  • the memory 1201 and the processor 1202 are interconnected via a bus 1203;
  • the bus 1203 may be a Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus or an Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) bus, etc.
  • PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect
  • EISA Extended Industry Standard Architecture
  • the bus may be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, etc.
  • FIG12 is represented by only one thick line, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the memory 1201 is used to store instructions, etc.
  • the memory 1201 may include RAM, and may also include non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as one or more disk memories.
  • the processor 1202 executes the computer instructions stored in the memory 1201 to implement the above functions, thereby realizing the functions of the communication device 1200.
  • the communication device 1200 may further include a transceiver, wherein the processor 1202 may control the transceiver to receive and send messages, information or data, etc. The specific figure is not shown again.
  • the communication device 1200 may specifically be the first mobility management network element in the above embodiment; or, the communication device 1200 may specifically be the second mobility management network element in the above embodiment.
  • the processor 1202 may call the computer instructions in the memory 1201 to implement the first mobile management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4.
  • the operations performed by the management network element please refer to the related descriptions in the embodiments shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 above, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor 1202 may call the computer instructions in the memory 1201 to implement the operation performed by the second mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4.
  • the processor 1202 may call the computer instructions in the memory 1201 to implement the operation performed by the second mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4.
  • the processor 1202 may call the computer instructions in the memory 1201 to implement the operation performed by the first mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8.
  • the processor 1202 may call the computer instructions in the memory 1201 to implement the operation performed by the first mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8.
  • the processor 1202 may call the computer instructions in the memory 1201 to implement the operation performed by the second mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8.
  • the processor 1202 may call the computer instructions in the memory 1201 to implement the operation performed by the second mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, which may include the first mobility management network element and the second mobility management network element involved in the above embodiments.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is used to store instructions.
  • the instructions When the instructions are executed by a computer, the computer can implement the communication method provided by the above method embodiment.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which is used to store instructions.
  • the instructions When the instructions are executed by a computer, the computer can implement the communication method provided by the above method embodiment.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including a processor, wherein the processor is coupled to a memory and is used to call instructions in the memory so that the chip implements the communication method provided in the above method embodiment.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, which is coupled to a memory and is used to implement the communication method provided in the above method embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application may be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Therefore, the present application may adopt the form of a complete hardware embodiment, a complete software embodiment, or an embodiment in combination with software and hardware. Moreover, the present application may adopt the form of a computer program product implemented on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) containing instructions.
  • a computer-usable storage media including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.
  • each flow and/or box in the flow chart and/or block diagram, as well as the combination of the flow chart and/or box in the flow chart and/or block diagram can be implemented by instructions. These instructions can be provided to a processor of a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, an embedded processor or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine, so that the instructions executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing device produce a device for implementing the function specified in one flow chart or multiple flows and/or one box or multiple boxes in the block diagram.
  • These instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to operate in a specific manner, so that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce a manufactured product including an instruction device that implements the functions specified in one or more processes in the flowchart and/or one or more boxes in the block diagram.
  • These instructions may also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device so that a series of operational steps are executed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process, whereby the instructions executed on the computer or other programmable device provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more processes in the flowchart and/or one or more boxes in the block diagram.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A communication method and apparatus, which are used to ensure the continuity of services when a terminal device moves between coverage areas of different network systems, i.e., a home operator network and a visited operator network. The method comprises: a first mobility management network element receiving a first handover request message from a first access network device, determining to allow a terminal device to switch from a first-standard network in a first operator network to a second-standard network in a second operator network, and sending a second switching request message to a second mobility management network element; and the second mobility management network element sending a third switching request message to a third mobility management network element according to the second switching request message, to request switching of the terminal device from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network, wherein the first mobility management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the first operator network, the second mobility management network element belongs to a first-standard network in the second operator network, and the third mobility management network element belongs to the second-standard network in the second operator network.

Description

一种通信方法及装置A communication method and device

相关申请的交叉引用CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

本申请要求在2023年08月22日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202311062353.X、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China on August 22, 2023, with application number 202311062353.X and application name “A Communication Method and Device”, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.

技术领域Technical Field

本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and device.

背景技术Background Art

当前的漫游场景仅支持终端设备在拜访运营商网络中不同网络制式的覆盖区域(4G覆盖区域与5G覆盖区域)之间移动时保持业务的连续性,不支持终端设备在归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络不同网络制式的覆盖区域之间移动时保持业务的连续性。例如,终端设备接入拜访运营商网络,当终端设备移动时,由拜访运营商网络的5G覆盖区域移动到归属运营商网络的4G覆盖区域时,终端设备在移动过程中,会断开在拜访运营商网络的连接而重新向归属运营商网络发起注册请求,由此会导致终端设备出现业务中断。The current roaming scenario only supports the continuity of services when the terminal device moves between coverage areas of different network standards (4G coverage area and 5G coverage area) in the visited operator network, but does not support the continuity of services when the terminal device moves between coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network. For example, when a terminal device accesses the visited operator network and moves from the 5G coverage area of the visited operator network to the 4G coverage area of the home operator network, the terminal device will disconnect from the visited operator network and re-initiate a registration request to the home operator network during the movement, which will cause service interruption of the terminal device.

因此,如何保证终端设备在归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络不同网络制式的覆盖区域之间移动时保持业务的连续性为亟待解决的问题。Therefore, how to ensure that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between the coverage areas of the home operator network and the visited operator network with different network standards is an urgent problem to be solved.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本申请提供一种通信方法及装置,用以保证终端设备在归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络不同网络制式的覆盖区域之间移动时保持业务的连续性。The present application provides a communication method and apparatus for ensuring that service continuity is maintained when a terminal device moves between coverage areas of different network standards of a home operator network and a visited operator network.

第一方面,本申请提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以应用于第一移动管理网元,第一移动管理网元的处理器、芯片、芯片系统或者功能模块等。以应用于第一移动管理网元为例说明,该方法可以包括:第一移动管理网元从第一接入网设备接收第一切换请求消息,根据所述第一切换请求消息,确定允许终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络;所述第一移动管理网元向第二移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息。其中,所述第一切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络;所述第一接入网设备为共享接入网设备,所述终端设备通过所述第一接入网设备接入所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络;所述第二切换请求消息用于请求将所述终端设备从所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络;所述第一移动管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第二移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络。In a first aspect, the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a first mobility management network element, a processor, a chip, a chip system or a functional module of the first mobility management network element. Taking the application to the first mobility management network element as an example, the method may include: the first mobility management network element receives a first switching request message from a first access network device, and according to the first switching request message, determines to allow a terminal device to switch from a first standard network in a first operator network to a second standard network in a second operator network; the first mobility management network element sends a second switching request message to the second mobility management network element. Wherein, the first switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from a first standard network in a first operator network to a second standard network in a second operator network; the first access network device is a shared access network device, and the terminal device accesses the first standard network in the first operator network through the first access network device; the second switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network; the first mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network, and the second mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the second operator network.

通过上述方法,可以将终端设备在拜访运营商网络发起的不同制式间的切换请求转换成两步:归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络间同一制式间的切换和归属运营商网络的不同制式间的切换,后续可以保证终端设备在归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络不同网络制式的覆盖区域之间移动时保持业务的连续性。Through the above method, the switching request between different standards initiated by the terminal device in the visited operator network can be converted into two steps: switching between the same standard between the home operator network and the visited operator network and switching between different standards of the home operator network. Subsequently, it can be ensured that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between the coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第一切换请求消息可以包括所述终端设备当前使用的第一公用陆地移动网(public land mobile network,PLMN)的标识,所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第一切换请求消息确定允许所述终端设备从所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络,方法可以为:所述第一移动管理网元确定所述第一PLMN的标识是所述第二运营商网络的共享PLMN标识,所述共享PLMN标识用于所述第二运营商网络的用户接入所述第一运营商网络的共享接入网设备。这样,所述第一移动管理网元可以准确确定允许所述终端设备从所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络。In one possible design, the first handover request message may include an identifier of a first public land mobile network (PLMN) currently used by the terminal device, and the first mobile management network element determines, based on the first handover request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network. The method may be: the first mobile management network element determines that the identifier of the first PLMN is a shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network, and the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access a shared access network device of the first operator network. In this way, the first mobile management network element can accurately determine that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第一切换请求消息还可以包括所述终端设备的目标接入网设备的标识;进一步地,所述第一移动管理网元可以根据所述目标接入网设备的标识,确定所述目标接入网设备所属的第二PLMN的标识,所述第二PLMN与所述第二运营商网络对应;进一步地,所述第一移动管理网 元确定所述第一PLMN的标识是所述第二运营商网络的共享PLMN标识,方法可以为:所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第一PLMN的标识和所述第二PLMN的标识,确定所述第一PLMN与所述第二PLMN属于等效PLMN。这样,所述第一移动管理网元可以确定所述第一PLMN的标识是所述第二运营商网络的共享PLMN标识,进而可以准确确定允许所述终端设备从所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络。In a possible design, the first switching request message may also include an identifier of a target access network device of the terminal device; further, the first mobility management network element may determine an identifier of a second PLMN to which the target access network device belongs based on the identifier of the target access network device, and the second PLMN corresponds to the second operator network .... The first mobile management network element determines that the identifier of the first PLMN is the shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network. The method may be: the first mobile management network element determines that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs according to the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN. In this way, the first mobile management network element can determine that the identifier of the first PLMN is the shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network, and further accurately determine that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第一PLMN的标识和所述第二PLMN的标识,确定所述第一PLMN与所述第二PLMN属于等效PLMN,方法可以为:所述第一移动管理网元确定所述第一PLMN的标识和所述第二PLMN的标识存在等效映射关系。这样所述第一移动管理网元准确确定所述第一PLMN与所述第二PLMN属于等效PLMN。In one possible design, the first mobility management network element determines that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs according to the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN. The method may be: the first mobility management network element determines that there is an equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN. In this way, the first mobility management network element accurately determines that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第一移动管理网元向所述第二移动管理网元发送所述第二切换请求消息之前,可以根据所述第一切换请求消息,生成所述第二切换请求消息,以使得第一移动管理网元向第二移动管理网元发送准确的第二切换请求消息。In one possible design, before the first mobility management network element sends the second switching request message to the second mobility management network element, it can generate the second switching request message based on the first switching request message, so that the first mobility management network element sends an accurate second switching request message to the second mobility management network element.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第一切换请求消息,生成所述第二切换请求消息,方法可以为:所述第一移动管理网元生成所述第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息包括所述第二PLMN的标识以及所述第一切换请求消息中除所述第一PLMN的标识之外的信息。这样第一移动管理网元可以准确确定第二切换请求消息。In one possible design, the first mobility management network element generates the second handover request message according to the first handover request message, and the method may be: the first mobility management network element generates the second handover request message, and the second handover request message includes the identifier of the second PLMN and the information in the first handover request message except the identifier of the first PLMN. In this way, the first mobility management network element can accurately determine the second handover request message.

在一个可能的设计中,当所述第一切换请求消息包括第一切换原因值,且所述第一切换原因值用于指示所述终端设备从所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二制式网络时,所述第一移动管理网元向所述第二移动管理网元发送所述第二切换请求消息。这样第一移动管理网元可以将第二切换请求消息转发到第二运营商网络中的第二移动管理网元。In one possible design, when the first switching request message includes a first switching reason value, and the first switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the first standard network to the second standard network, the first mobility management network element sends the second switching request message to the second mobility management network element. In this way, the first mobility management network element can forward the second switching request message to the second mobility management network element in the second operator network.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第二切换请求消息包括所述第一切换原因值。In one possible design, the second switching request message includes the first switching reason value.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第二切换请求消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息转发给所述第一移动管理网元。这样可以使得后续第二移动管理网元接收到切换完成通知消息后转发给所述第一移动管理网元。In one possible design, the second handover request message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the second mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the first mobility management network element. In this way, the second mobility management network element can subsequently forward the received handover completion notification message to the first mobility management network element.

第二方面,本申请提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以应用于第二移动管理网元,第二移动管理网元的处理器、芯片、芯片系统或者功能模块等。以应用于第二移动管理网元为例说明,该方法可以包括:第二移动管理网元从第一移动管理网元接收第二切换请求消息,根据所述第二切换请求消息,向第三移动管理网元发送第三切换请求消息。其中,所述第二切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络;所述第三切换请求消息用于请求将所述终端设备从第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络;所述第一移动管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第二移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第三移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络。In a second aspect, the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a second mobile management network element, a processor, a chip, a chip system or a functional module of the second mobile management network element. Taking the application to the second mobile management network element as an example, the method may include: the second mobile management network element receives a second switching request message from the first mobile management network element, and sends a third switching request message to the third mobile management network element according to the second switching request message. The second switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network; the third switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network; the first mobile management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network, the second mobile management network element belongs to the first standard network in the second operator network, and the third mobile management network element belongs to the second standard network in the second operator network.

通过上述方法,可以将终端设备在拜访运营商网络发起的不同制式间的切换请求转换成两步:归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络间同一制式间的切换和归属运营商网络的不同制式间的切换,后续可以保证终端设备在归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络不同网络制式的覆盖区域之间移动时保持业务的连续性。Through the above method, the switching request between different standards initiated by the terminal device in the visited operator network can be converted into two steps: switching between the same standard between the home operator network and the visited operator network and switching between different standards of the home operator network. Subsequently, it can be ensured that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between the coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第二移动管理网元根据所述第二切换请求消息,向所述第三移动管理网元发送所述第三切换请求消息,方法可以为:当所述第二切换请求消息包括第一切换原因值,且所述第一切换原因值用于指示所述终端设备从所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二制式网络时,所述第二移动管理网元可以向所述第三移动管理网元发送所述第三切换请求消息。这样第二移动管理网元可以根据第一切换原因值选择合适的第三移动管理网元,并向所述第三移动管理网元发送第三切换请求消息。In a possible design, the second mobility management network element sends the third handover request message to the third mobility management network element according to the second handover request message, and the method may be: when the second handover request message includes a first handover reason value, and the first handover reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the first standard network to the second standard network, the second mobility management network element may send the third handover request message to the third mobility management network element. In this way, the second mobility management network element may select a suitable third mobility management network element according to the first handover reason value, and send the third handover request message to the third mobility management network element.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第二切换请求消息可以包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息发送给所述第一移动管理网元;进一步地,所述第二移动管理网元从所述第三移动管理网元接收切换完成通知消息,所述切换完成通知消息用于通知所述终端设备已切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络;所述第二移动管理网元根据所述第一指示信息,向所述第一移动管理网元发送所述切换完成通知消息。这样第一移动管理网元可以确定终端设备已切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络。 In a possible design, the second handover request message may include first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the second mobility management network element to send the received handover completion notification message to the first mobility management network element; further, the second mobility management network element receives a handover completion notification message from the third mobility management network element, and the handover completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that the terminal device has been switched to the second standard network in the second operator network; the second mobility management network element sends the handover completion notification message to the first mobility management network element according to the first indication information. In this way, the first mobility management network element can determine that the terminal device has been switched to the second standard network in the second operator network.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第二切换请求消息包括第二PLMN的标识,所述第二PLMN的标识用于标识所述终端设备的目标接入网设备所属的PLMN。In one possible design, the second switching request message includes an identifier of a second PLMN, and the identifier of the second PLMN is used to identify the PLMN to which the target access network device of the terminal device belongs.

第三方面,本申请提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以应用于第二移动管理网元,第二移动管理网元的处理器、芯片、芯片系统或者功能模块等。以应用于第二移动管理网元为例说明,该方法可以包括:第二移动管理网元从第三移动管理网元接收第一切换请求消息,根据所述第一切换请求消息,确定所述终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享接入网设备,所述目标接入网设备用于所述终端设备接入所述第一运营商网络;所述第二移动管理网元根据所述第一切换请求消息,向第一移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息。其中,所述第一切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络切换到第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络;所述第二切换请求消息用于请求将所述终端设备从所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络;所述第一移动管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第二移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第三移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络。In a third aspect, the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a second mobility management network element, a processor, a chip, a chip system or a functional module of the second mobility management network element. Taking the application to the second mobility management network element as an example, the method may include: the second mobility management network element receives a first switching request message from a third mobility management network element, and according to the first switching request message, determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device, and the target access network device is used for the terminal device to access the first operator network; the second mobility management network element sends a second switching request message to the first mobility management network element according to the first switching request message. The first switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network; the second switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network; the first mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network, the second mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the second operator network, and the third mobility management network element belongs to the second standard network in the second operator network.

通过上述方法,可以将终端设备从归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络间的不同制式间的切换请求转换成两步:归属运营商网络内不同制式间的切换和归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络间同一制式间的切换,可以保证终端设备在归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络不同网络制式的覆盖区域之间移动时保持业务的连续性。Through the above method, the switching request between different standards of the terminal device between the home operator network and the visited operator network can be converted into two steps: switching between different standards within the home operator network and switching between the same standard between the home operator network and the visited operator network. This can ensure that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between the coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第一切换请求消息可以包括所述目标接入网设备的标识;所述第二移动管理网元根据所述第一切换请求消息确定所述终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享接入网设备,方法可以为:所述第二移动管理网元根据所述目标接入网设备的标识,确定所述目标接入网设备所属的第一PLMN的标识,所述第一PLMN与所述第一运营商网络对应;若所述第一PLMN的标识与共享PLMN标识对应,则所述第二移动管理网元确定所述终端设备的所述目标接入网设备为所述共享接入网设备;其中,所述共享PLMN标识用于所述第二运营商网络的用户接入所述第一运营商网络的共享接入网设备。这样所述第二移动管理网元可以准确确定所述终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享接入网设备。In a possible design, the first handover request message may include an identifier of the target access network device; the second mobility management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device according to the first handover request message, and the method may be: the second mobility management network element determines the identifier of the first PLMN to which the target access network device belongs according to the identifier of the target access network device, and the first PLMN corresponds to the first operator network; if the identifier of the first PLMN corresponds to the shared PLMN identifier, the second mobility management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is the shared access network device; wherein the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access the shared access network device of the first operator network. In this way, the second mobility management network element can accurately determine that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device.

在一个可能的设计中,当所述第一切换请求消息包括第二切换原因值,且所述第二切换原因值用于指示所述终端设备从所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一制式网络时,所述第二移动管理网元可以向所述第一移动管理网元发送所述第二切换请求消息。这样第二移动管理网元可以将第二切换请求消息转发到第一运营商网络中的第一移动管理网元。In one possible design, when the first handover request message includes a second handover reason value, and the second handover reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the second standard network to the first standard network, the second mobility management network element may send the second handover request message to the first mobility management network element. In this way, the second mobility management network element may forward the second handover request message to the first mobility management network element in the first operator network.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第二移动管理网元向所述第一移动管理网元发送所述第二切换请求消息之前,可以根据所述第一切换请求消息,生成所述第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息中包含所述共享PLMN标识以及所述第一切换请求消息中包含的信息。这样可以使得第二移动管理网元向第一移动管理网元发送准确的第二切换请求消息。In one possible design, before the second mobility management network element sends the second handover request message to the first mobility management network element, the second handover request message may be generated according to the first handover request message, and the second handover request message includes the shared PLMN identifier and the information included in the first handover request message. In this way, the second mobility management network element can send an accurate second handover request message to the first mobility management network element.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第二切换请求消息中可以包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息转发给所述第二移动管理网元。这样可以使得后续第一移动管理网元接收到切换完成通知消息后转发给所述第二移动管理网元。In one possible design, the second handover request message may include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to instruct the first mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the second mobility management network element. In this way, the first mobility management network element can subsequently forward the received handover completion notification message to the second mobility management network element.

第四方面,本申请提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以应用于第一移动管理网元,第一移动管理网元的处理器、芯片、芯片系统或者功能模块等。以应用于第一移动管理网元为例说明,该方法可以包括:第一移动管理网元从第二移动管理网元接收第二切换请求消息,根据所述第二切换请求消息,确定允许所述终端设备从所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络;之后,所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第二切换请求消息,向第一会话管理网元发送会话建立请求消息。其中,所述第二切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络切换到第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络;所述第一移动管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第二移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第一会话管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a first mobile management network element, a processor, a chip, a chip system or a functional module of the first mobile management network element. Taking the application to the first mobile management network element as an example, the method may include: the first mobile management network element receives a second switching request message from the second mobile management network element, and according to the second switching request message, determines to allow the terminal device to switch from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network; thereafter, the first mobile management network element sends a session establishment request message to the first session management network element according to the second switching request message. The second switching request message is used to request to switch the terminal device from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network; the first mobile management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network, the second mobile management network element belongs to the first standard network in the second operator network, and the first session management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network.

通过上述方法,将终端设备从归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络间的不同制式间的切换请求转换成两步:归属运营商网络内不同制式间的切换和归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络间同一制式间的切换,可以保证终端设备在归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络不同网络制式的覆盖区域之间移动时保持业务的连续性。Through the above method, the switching request between different standards of the terminal device between the home operator network and the visited operator network is converted into two steps: switching between different standards within the home operator network and switching between the same standard between the home operator network and the visited operator network. This can ensure that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between the coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第二切换请求消息可以包括共享PLMN标识,所述共享PLMN标识用 于所述第二运营商网络的用户接入所述第一运营商网络的共享接入网设备;所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第二切换请求消息,确定允许所述终端设备从所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,方法可以为:当所述终端设备当前使用的第二PLMN的标识与所述共享PLMN标识存在等效映射关系,则所述第一移动管理网元确定允许所述终端设备从所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络。这样第一移动管理网元可以准确确定允许所述终端设备从所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络。In one possible design, the second handover request message may include a shared PLMN identifier. The first mobile management network element determines, based on the second switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network. The method may be: when the identifier of the second PLMN currently used by the terminal device has an equivalent mapping relationship with the shared PLMN identifier, the first mobile management network element determines that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network. In this way, the first mobile management network element can accurately determine that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network.

在一个可能的设计中,所述第二切换请求消息中可以包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息转发给所述第二移动管理网元;进一步地,所述第一移动管理网元接收到切换完成通知消息后,根据所述第二指示信息,向所述第二移动管理网元发送所述切换完成通知消息。其中,所述切换完成通知消息用于通知所述终端设备已切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络。这样第二移动管理网元可以确定终端设备已切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络。In a possible design, the second handover request message may include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to instruct the first mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the second mobility management network element; further, after receiving the handover completion notification message, the first mobility management network element sends the handover completion notification message to the second mobility management network element according to the second indication information. The handover completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that it has switched to the first standard network in the first operator network. In this way, the second mobility management network element can determine that the terminal device has switched to the first standard network in the first operator network.

第五方面,本申请还提供了一种通信装置,所述通信装置可以是第一移动管理网元,该通信装置具有实现上述第一方面或第一方面的各个可能的设计示例中,或者上述第四方面或第四方面的各个可能的设计示例中的方法的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a fifth aspect, the present application further provides a communication device, which may be a first mobile management network element, and the communication device has the function of implementing the method in the first aspect or each possible design example of the first aspect, or the fourth aspect or each possible design example of the fourth aspect. The function may be implemented by hardware, or may be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.

在一个可能的设计中,所述通信装置的结构中可以包括收发单元和处理单元,这些单元可以执行上述第一方面或第一方面的各个可能的设计示例中,或者上述第四方面或第四方面的各个可能的设计示例中描述的方法,此处不做赘述。In one possible design, the structure of the communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit, which can execute the methods described in the above-mentioned first aspect or various possible design examples of the first aspect, or the above-mentioned fourth aspect or various possible design examples of the fourth aspect, which are not repeated here.

在一个可能的设计中,所述通信装置的结构中包括存储器和处理器。可选的通信装置还包括收发器,所述收发器用于收发数据、消息或信息等,以及用于与通信系统中的其他设备进行通信交互。所述处理器被配置为支持所述通信装置执行上述第一方面或第一方面的各个可能的设计示例中,或者上述第四方面或第四方面的各个可能的设计示例中的相应的功能。所述存储器与所述处理器耦合,其保存所述通信装置必要的计算机指令和数据。In one possible design, the structure of the communication device includes a memory and a processor. The optional communication device also includes a transceiver, which is used to send and receive data, messages or information, and is used to communicate and interact with other devices in the communication system. The processor is configured to support the communication device to perform the corresponding functions in the first aspect or each possible design example of the first aspect, or in the fourth aspect or each possible design example of the fourth aspect. The memory is coupled to the processor, which stores the computer instructions and data necessary for the communication device.

第六方面,本申请还提供了一种通信装置,所述通信装置可以是第二移动管理网元,该通信装置具有实现上述第二方面或第二方面的各个可能的设计示例中,或者上述第三方面或第三方面的各个可能的设计示例中的方法的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a sixth aspect, the present application further provides a communication device, which may be a second mobility management network element, and the communication device has the function of implementing the method in the second aspect or each possible design example of the second aspect, or the third aspect or each possible design example of the third aspect. The function may be implemented by hardware, or may be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.

在一个可能的设计中,所述通信装置的结构中可以包括收发单元和处理单元,这些单元可以执行上述第二方面或第二方面的各个可能的设计示例中,或者上述第三方面或第三方面的各个可能的设计示例中描述的方法,此处不做赘述。In one possible design, the structure of the communication device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit, which can execute the methods described in the above-mentioned second aspect or various possible design examples of the second aspect, or the above-mentioned third aspect or various possible design examples of the third aspect, which are not repeated here.

在一个可能的设计中,所述通信装置的结构中包括存储器和处理器。可选的通信装置还包括收发器,所述收发器用于收发数据、消息或信息等,以及用于与通信系统中的其他设备进行通信交互。所述处理器被配置为支持所述通信装置执行上述第二方面或第二方面的各个可能的设计示例中,或者上述第三方面或第三方面的各个可能的设计示例中的相应的功能。所述存储器与所述处理器耦合,其保存所述通信装置必要的计算机指令和数据。In one possible design, the structure of the communication device includes a memory and a processor. The optional communication device also includes a transceiver, which is used to send and receive data, messages or information, and is used to communicate and interact with other devices in the communication system. The processor is configured to support the communication device to perform the corresponding functions in the above-mentioned second aspect or each possible design example of the second aspect, or in the above-mentioned third aspect or each possible design example of the third aspect. The memory is coupled to the processor, which stores the computer instructions and data necessary for the communication device.

第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统,可以包括第一移动管理网元和第二移动管理网元,其中,第一移动管理网元可以执行上述第一方面及其任一可能设计中,或者上述第四方面及其任一可能设计中的方法;第二移动管理网元用于执行上述第二方面及其任一可能设计中,或者上述第三方面及其任一可能设计中的方法。In the seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, which may include a first mobile management network element and a second mobile management network element, wherein the first mobile management network element may execute the method in the above-mentioned first aspect and any possible design thereof, or the above-mentioned fourth aspect and any possible design thereof; the second mobile management network element is used to execute the method in the above-mentioned second aspect and any possible design thereof, or the above-mentioned third aspect and any possible design thereof.

第八方面,本申请实施例提供的一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有指令,当指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例第一方面及其任一可能的设计中,或第二方面及其任一可能的设计中,或第三方面及其任一可能的设计中,或第四方面及其任一可能的设计中所述的方法。示例性的,计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。以此为例但不限于:计算机可读介质可以包括非瞬态计算机可读介质、随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM)、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)、CD-ROM或其他光盘存储、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或 数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores instructions. When the instructions are executed on a computer, the computer executes the method described in the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application and any possible design thereof, or the second aspect and any possible design thereof, or the third aspect and any possible design thereof, or the fourth aspect and any possible design thereof. Exemplarily, the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer. Taking this as an example but not limited to: a computer-readable medium may include a non-transitory computer-readable medium, a random-access memory (RAM), a read-only memory (ROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, a magnetic disk storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or a medium that can be used to carry or store instructions or Any other medium that can store desired program code in the form of data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.

第九方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,当所述指令在计算机上运行时,使得上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能的设计中,或上述第二方面或第二方面任一种可能的设计中,或上述第三方面或第三方面任一种可能的设计中,或上述第四方面或第四方面任一种可能的设计中所述的方法被执行。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, comprising instructions, which, when executed on a computer, causes the method described in the first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect, or the second aspect or any possible design of the second aspect, or the third aspect or any possible design of the third aspect, or the fourth aspect or any possible design of the fourth aspect to be executed.

第十方面,本申请还提供了一种芯片,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,用于读取并执行所述存储器中存储的指令,以使所述芯片实现上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能的设计中,或上述第二方面或第二方面任一种可能的设计中,或上述第三方面或第三方面任一种可能的设计中,或上述第四方面或第四方面任一种可能的设计中所述的方法。In the tenth aspect, the present application also provides a chip, including a processor, which is coupled to a memory and is used to read and execute instructions stored in the memory, so that the chip implements the method described in the above-mentioned first aspect or any possible design of the first aspect, or the above-mentioned second aspect or any possible design of the second aspect, or the above-mentioned third aspect or any possible design of the third aspect, or the above-mentioned fourth aspect or any possible design of the fourth aspect.

上述第五方面至第十方面中的各个方面以及各个方面可能达到的技术效果请参照上述针对第一方面或第一方面中的各种可能方案,或者上述第二方面或第二方面中的各种可能方案,或第三方面及第三方面中的各种可能方案,或第四方面及第四方面中的各种可能方案可以达到的技术效果说明,这里不再重复赘述。For each of the above-mentioned fifth to tenth aspects and the technical effects that may be achieved by each of the aspects, please refer to the above-mentioned description of the technical effects that can be achieved by the first aspect or the various possible schemes in the first aspect, or the above-mentioned second aspect or the various possible schemes in the second aspect, or the third aspect and the various possible schemes in the third aspect, or the fourth aspect and the various possible schemes in the fourth aspect, and no repetition will be given here.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

图1为一种应用场景的示意图;FIG1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario;

图2为另一种应用场景的示意图;FIG2 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario;

图3为本申请提供的一种通信方法的流程图;FIG3 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application;

图4为本申请提供的另一种通信方法的流程图;FIG4 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application;

图5为本申请提供的另一种通信方法的流程图;FIG5 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application;

图6为本申请提供的另一种通信方法的流程图;FIG6 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application;

图7为本申请提供的另一种通信方法的流程图;FIG7 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application;

图8为本申请提供的另一种通信方法的流程图;FIG8 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application;

图9为本申请提供的另一种通信方法的流程图;FIG9 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application;

图10为本申请提供的另一种通信方法的流程图;FIG10 is a flow chart of another communication method provided by the present application;

图11为本申请提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;FIG11 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided by the present application;

图12为本申请提供的一种通信装置的结构图。FIG12 is a structural diagram of a communication device provided in the present application.

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

下面将结合附图对本申请作进一步地详细描述。The present application will be described in further detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.

本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置,用以保证终端设备在归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络不同网络制式的覆盖区域之间移动时保持业务的连续性。其中,本申请所述方法和装置基于同一技术构思,由于方法及装置解决问题的原理相似,因此装置与方法的实施可以相互参见,重复之处不再赘述。The embodiment of the present application provides a communication method and device to ensure that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between the coverage areas of the home operator network and the visited operator network with different network standards. The method and device described in the present application are based on the same technical concept. Since the principles of solving the problem by the method and the device are similar, the implementation of the device and the method can refer to each other, and the repeated parts will not be repeated.

以下,对本申请实施例涉及的部分用语进行解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。Below, some terms involved in the embodiments of the present application are explained to facilitate understanding by those skilled in the art.

1)接入网设备,用于为终端设备提供接入的设备。接入网设备可以包括无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)设备,例如基站。接入网设备可以是基站(base station)、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统或高级长期演进(long term evolution-advanced,LTE-A)中的演进型基站(evolved Node B),可简称为eNB或e-NodeB)、发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统中的下一代基站(next generation NodeB,gNB)、第六代(6th generation,6G)移动通信系统中的下一代基站、未来移动通信系统中的基站或无线局域网(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入节点等,还可以为开放接入网(open RAN,ORAN)系统中的接入网设备等。可选的,接入网设备也可以是完成基站部分功能的模块或单元,例如,接入网设备可以是集中式单元(central unit,CU),分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),CU-控制面(control plane,CP),CU-用户面(user plane,UP),或者无线单元(radio unit,RU)等。这里的CU完成基站的无线资源控制协议和分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)的功能,还可以完成业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)的功能;DU完成基站的无线链路控制层和介质访问控制(medium access control,MAC)层的功能,还可以完成部分物理层或全部物理层的功能。其中,在不同系统中,CU(或CU-CP 和CU-UP)、DU或RU也可以有不同的名称,但是本领域的技术人员可以理解其含义。例如,在ORAN系统中,CU还可以称为O-CU,DU还可以称为开放(open,O)-DU,CU-CP还可以称为O-CU-CP,CU-UP还可以称为O-CUP-UP,RU还可以称为O-RU。1) Access network equipment, equipment used to provide access for terminal equipment. Access network equipment may include radio access network (RAN) equipment, such as base stations. Access network equipment may be a base station, an evolved Node B in a long term evolution (LTE) system or an advanced long term evolution (LTE-A), which may be referred to as eNB or e-NodeB for short), a transmission reception point (TRP), a next generation base station (next generation NodeB, gNB) in a fifth generation (5G) mobile communication system, a next generation base station in a sixth generation (6G) mobile communication system, a base station in a future mobile communication system, or an access node in a wireless local area network (WiFi) system, etc. It may also be an access network device in an open access network (open RAN, ORAN) system, etc. Optionally, the access network device may also be a module or unit that completes part of the functions of the base station. For example, the access network device may be a centralized unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU), a CU-control plane (CP), a CU-user plane (UP), or a radio unit (RU), etc. The CU here completes the functions of the radio resource control protocol and the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) of the base station, and can also complete the function of the service data adaptation protocol (SDAP); the DU completes the functions of the radio link control layer and the medium access control (MAC) layer of the base station, and can also complete part of the physical layer or all of the physical layer. Among them, in different systems, the CU (or CU-CP The CU-UP), DU or RU may also have different names, but those skilled in the art can understand their meanings. For example, in the ORAN system, CU may also be called O-CU, DU may also be called open (open, O)-DU, CU-CP may also be called O-CU-CP, CU-UP may also be called O-CUP-UP, and RU may also be called O-RU.

示例性的,接入网设备可以是宏基站,也可以是微基站(也称为小站)或室内站,还可以是中继节点或施主节点等。接入网设备还可以是无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU)或射频拉远单元(remote radio unit,RRU),或无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wifi)接入点(access point,AP),或者在云无线接入网(cloud radio access netowrk,CRAN)中的基带池(BBU pool)和RRU等。本申请的实施例对接入网设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。Exemplarily, the access network device may be a macro base station, a micro base station (also called a small station) or an indoor station, or a relay node or a donor node, etc. The access network device may also be a radio network controller (RNC), a node B (NB), a base station controller (BSC), a base transceiver station (BTS), a home base station (e.g., home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), a baseband unit (BBU) or a remote radio unit (RRU), or a wireless fidelity (Wifi) access point (AP), or a baseband pool (BBU pool) and RRU in a cloud radio access network (CRAN), etc. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the access network device.

本申请中,接入网设备也可以是一个功能模块、芯片或芯片系统。可选地,功能模块、芯片或芯片系统可以设置于接入网络设备内。In the present application, the access network device may also be a functional module, a chip or a chip system. Optionally, the functional module, the chip or the chip system may be arranged in the access network device.

本申请中,共享接入网设备是不同的运营商之间可以共享的接入网设备,共享接入网设备可以为5G接入网设备。In this application, the shared access network device is an access network device that can be shared between different operators, and the shared access network device can be a 5G access network device.

2)终端设备,又可以称之为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)等,是一种向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备。例如,终端设备可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前,终端设备可以是:手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、可穿戴设备,虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、XR设备、MR设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self-driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端,或智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等。2) Terminal equipment, also known as user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), etc., is a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to users. For example, terminal equipment may include handheld devices with wireless connection functions, vehicle-mounted devices, etc. At present, terminal devices can be: mobile phones, tablet computers, laptops, PDAs, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, augmented reality (AR) devices, XR devices, MR devices, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, or wireless terminals in smart homes, etc.

终端设备还可以是设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)终端设备、车与任何事物(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信终端设备、智能车辆、车机系统(或称车联网系统)(telematics box,TBOX)、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications,M2M/MTC)终端设备、物联网(internet of things,IoT)终端设备。例如,终端设备可以为车辆、船舶或飞行器等载具或终端型路边单元,或内置于车辆或路边单元的通信模块或芯片。例如终端装置可以是车载模组。终端设备也可以为路侧单元(road side unit,RSU)。The terminal device may also be a device-to-device (D2D) communication terminal device, a vehicle to everything (V2X) communication terminal device, an intelligent vehicle, a telematics box (TBOX), a machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC) terminal device, or an Internet of Things (IoT) terminal device. For example, the terminal device may be a vehicle, ship, or aircraft, or a terminal-type roadside unit, or a communication module or chip built into a vehicle or roadside unit. For example, the terminal device may be a vehicle-mounted module. The terminal device may also be a roadside unit (RSU).

本申请中,终端设备也可以是一个功能模块、芯片或芯片系统。可选地,功能模块、芯片或芯片系统可以设置于终端设备内。In the present application, the terminal device may also be a functional module, a chip or a chip system. Optionally, the functional module, the chip or the chip system may be arranged in the terminal device.

3)公用陆地移动网(public land mobile network,PLMN)3) Public land mobile network (PLMN)

PLMN可以是由政府或经营者建立和经营的网络,用于为公众提供陆地移动通信业务。该网络可以与公共交换电话网(public switched telephone network,PSTN)互连,形成整个地区或国家规模的通信网。PLMN用于区分一个国家或地区不同的移动通信运营商,一个服务区可由一个或若干个PLMN组成。PLMN由3位移动国家码(mobile country code,MCC)和2位移动网络码(mobile network code,MNC)组成。PLMN can be a network established and operated by the government or operators to provide land mobile communication services to the public. The network can be interconnected with the public switched telephone network (PSTN) to form a communication network on a regional or national scale. PLMN is used to distinguish different mobile communication operators in a country or region. A service area can be composed of one or several PLMNs. PLMN consists of a 3-digit mobile country code (MCC) and a 2-digit mobile network code (MNC).

PLMN是国际移动用户识别码(international mobile subscriber identity,IMSI)的重要组成部分。IMSI不超过15位数字,开头5位是PLMN,后面的数字由网络运营商根据需要进行分配。IMSI存储在用户的用户身份模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)卡或全球用户身份模块(universal subscriber identity module,USIM)中。IMSI中的PLMN称为归属公共陆地移动网络(home public land mobile network,HPLMN),HPLMN是用户开户的PLMN,用户信息和用户能得到的服务存在于HPLMN中。当用户离开HPLMN的覆盖而注册到其他的PLMN,该用户就进入了漫游状态,该用户在漫游时对应的PLMN称为VPLMN。PLMN is an important part of the international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI). IMSI is no more than 15 digits, the first 5 digits are PLMN, and the remaining digits are allocated by the network operator according to needs. IMSI is stored in the user's subscriber identity module (SIM) card or universal subscriber identity module (USIM). The PLMN in the IMSI is called the home public land mobile network (HPLMN). The HPLMN is the PLMN where the user opens an account. User information and the services available to the user are stored in the HPLMN. When a user leaves the coverage of the HPLMN and registers with another PLMN, the user enters the roaming state. The corresponding PLMN of the user when roaming is called the VPLMN.

一个小区对应一个或多个PLMN,小区广播的系统信息中可以包含该小区对应的PLMN的标识信息(identity)。不同的小区对应的PLMN可以相同,也可以不同。A cell corresponds to one or more PLMNs, and the system information broadcast by the cell may include the identity information of the PLMN corresponding to the cell. The PLMNs corresponding to different cells may be the same or different.

终端设备接入网络时,先进行PLMN的搜索,在确定了PLMN之后再在该PLMN上执行小区选择过程,并选择该PLMN上的合适小区进行驻留。When a terminal device accesses a network, it first searches for a PLMN, and after determining the PLMN, it performs a cell selection process on the PLMN and selects a suitable cell on the PLMN to reside in.

4)在本申请的描述中,“第一”、“第二”等词汇,仅用于区分描述的目的,而不能理解为指示或暗 示相对重要性,也不能理解为指示或暗示顺序。4) In the description of this application, the words "first", "second" and so on are only used for the purpose of distinguishing descriptions and should not be understood as indicating or implying The items are not intended to indicate relative importance, nor should they be understood as indicating or implying an order.

在本申请中的描述中,“至少一个(种)”是指一个(种)或者多个(种),多个(种)是指两个(种)或者两个(种)以上。“以下至少一项”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项或复数项的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项,可以表示:a,b,c,a和b,a和c,b和c,或,a和b和c,其中,a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In the description of this application, "at least one" means one or more, and more means two or more. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items. For example, at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a, b and c, where a, b, c can be single or plural.

本申请的描述中“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A、B可以是单数或者复数。“/”表示“或”,例如a/b表示a或b。In the description of this application, "and/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there may be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A and B can be singular or plural. "/" means "or", for example, a/b means a or b.

为了更加清晰地描述本申请实施例的技术方案,下面结合附图,对本申请实施例提供的通信方法及装置进行详细说明。In order to more clearly describe the technical solution of the embodiments of the present application, the communication method and device provided in the embodiments of the present application are described in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.

图1示出了一种应用场景的示意图。图1所示的应用场景也可以视为一种漫游的架构示意图,例如为基于归属路由(home routed,HR)的漫游架构示意图。该应用场景包括终端设备的拜访公用陆地移动网(visited public land mobile network,VPLMN/vPLMN)和终端设备的归属公共陆地移动网络(home public land mobile network,HPLMN/hPLMN)。拜访公共陆地移动网络也可称为拜访地(或受访地)公用陆地移动网或拜访网络,归属公用陆地移动网也可称为归属地公用陆地移动网或归属网络。FIG1 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario. The application scenario shown in FIG1 can also be regarded as a schematic diagram of a roaming architecture, for example, a schematic diagram of a roaming architecture based on home routing (home routed, HR). The application scenario includes a visited public land mobile network (VPLMN/vPLMN) of a terminal device and a home public land mobile network (HPLMN/hPLMN) of the terminal device. The visited public land mobile network can also be referred to as a visited (or visited) public land mobile network or a visited network, and the home public land mobile network can also be referred to as a home public land mobile network or a home network.

vPLMN和hPLMN可以通过各自的安全边缘保护代理(security edge protection proxy,SEPP)实现通信。其中,vPLMN中的SEPP可称为拜访SEPP(vSEPP或VSEPP),hPLMN中的SEPP可称为归属SEPP(hSEPP或HSEPP)。如图1所示,vPLMN和hPLMN可通过vSEPP和hSEPP通信。vPLMN and hPLMN can communicate through their respective security edge protection proxies (SEPP). The SEPP in the vPLMN can be called a visited SEPP (vSEPP or VSEPP), and the SEPP in the hPLMN can be called a home SEPP (hSEPP or HSEPP). As shown in Figure 1, the vPLMN and hPLMN can communicate through the vSEPP and hSEPP.

示例性的,vPLMN还可以包括网络切片选择功能(network slice selection function,NSSF)网元、网络开放功能(network exposure function,NEF)网元、网络存储功能(network repository function,NRF)网元、策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)、网络切片准入控制功能(network slice admission control function,NSACF)网元、接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元、会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)网元和用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元等。Exemplarily, the vPLMN may also include a network slice selection function (NSSF) network element, a network exposure function (NEF) network element, a network repository function (NRF) network element, a policy control function (PCF) network element, a network slice admission control function (NSACF) network element, an access and mobility management function (AMF) network element, a session management function (SMF) network element and a user plane function (UPF) network element, etc.

在vPLMN中,UE通过(R)AN接入网络,UE可通过N1接口(简称N1)与AMF通信;(R)AN通过N2接口(简称N2)与AMF通信;(R)AN通过N3接口(简称N3)与vPLMN中的UPF通信;vPLMN中的SMF通过N4接口(简称N4)与vPLMN中的UPF通信;vPLMN内的UPF之间可通过N9接口(简称N9)通信。In vPLMN, UE accesses the network through (R)AN, and UE can communicate with AMF through N1 interface (N1 for short); (R)AN communicates with AMF through N2 interface (N2 for short); (R)AN communicates with UPF in vPLMN through N3 interface (N3 for short); SMF in vPLMN communicates with UPF in vPLMN through N4 interface (N4 for short); UPFs in vPLMN can communicate with each other through N9 interface (N9 for short).

此外,vPLMN的NSSF、NEF、NRF、PCF、NSACF、AMF和SMF等可采用服务化接口进行交互。例如,NSSF对外提供的服务化接口为Nnssf;NEF对外提供的服务化接口为Nnef;NRF对外提供的服务化接口为Nnrf;PCF对外提供的服务化接口为Npcf;NSACF对外提供的服务化接口为Nnsacf;AMF对外提供的服务化接口为Namf;SMF对外提供的服务化接口为Nsmf。In addition, the NSSF, NEF, NRF, PCF, NSACF, AMF and SMF of the vPLMN can interact with each other using service-oriented interfaces. For example, the service-oriented interface provided by NSSF is Nnssf; the service-oriented interface provided by NEF is Nnef; the service-oriented interface provided by NRF is Nnrf; the service-oriented interface provided by PCF is Npcf; the service-oriented interface provided by NSACF is Nnsacf; the service-oriented interface provided by AMF is Namf; and the service-oriented interface provided by SMF is Nsmf.

示例性的,hPLMN还可以包括统一数据管理功能(unified data management,UDM)网元、NRF、NEF、NSSF、NSACF、SMF、AMF、鉴权服务功能(authentication server function,AUSF)网元、PCF、应用功能(application function,AF)网元和网络切片选择的认证和授权功能(network slice-specific authentication and suthorization function,NSSAAF)网元等。Exemplarily, hPLMN may also include unified data management function (UDM) network element, NRF, NEF, NSSF, NSACF, SMF, AMF, authentication service function (AUSF) network element, PCF, application function (AF) network element and network slice-specific authentication and authorization function (NSSAAF) network element, etc.

在hPLMN中,hPLMN中的SMF通过N4与hPLMN中的UPF通信;hPLMN内的UPF之间可通过N9通信;hPLMN内的UPF还可通过N9与vPLMN内的UPF通信;hPLMN内的UPF还可通过N6接口(简称N6)接入数据网络(data network,DN)。In hPLMN, the SMF in hPLMN communicates with the UPF in hPLMN through N4; UPFs in hPLMN can communicate with each other through N9; UPF in hPLMN can also communicate with UPF in vPLMN through N9; UPF in hPLMN can also access the data network (DN) through N6 interface (N6 for short).

此外,hPLMN的UDM、NRF、NEF、NSSF、NSACF、SMF、AMF、AUSF、PCF、AF和NSSAAF等可采用服务化接口进行交互。比如,UDM对外提供的服务化接口为Nudm;NRF对外提供的服务化接口为Nnrf;NEF对外提供的服务化接口为Nnef;NSSF对外提供的服务化接口为Nnssf;NSACF对外提供的服务化接口为Nnsacf;SMF对外提供的服务化接口为Nsmf;SMF对外提供的服务化接口为Nsmf;AMF对外提供的服务化接口为Namf;AUSF对外提供的服务化接口为Nausf;PCF对外提供的服务化接口为Npcf;AF对外提供的服务化接口为Naf;NSSAAF对外提供的服务化接口为Nnssaaf。In addition, the UDM, NRF, NEF, NSSF, NSACF, SMF, AMF, AUSF, PCF, AF and NSSAAF of hPLMN can interact with each other using service-oriented interfaces. For example, the service-oriented interface provided by UDM is Nudm; the service-oriented interface provided by NRF is Nnrf; the service-oriented interface provided by NEF is Nnef; the service-oriented interface provided by NSSF is Nnssf; the service-oriented interface provided by NSACF is Nnsacf; the service-oriented interface provided by SMF is Nsmf; the service-oriented interface provided by SMF is Nsmf; the service-oriented interface provided by AMF is Namf; the service-oriented interface provided by AUSF is Nausf; the service-oriented interface provided by PCF is Npcf; the service-oriented interface provided by AF is Naf; and the service-oriented interface provided by NSSAAF is Nnssaaf.

下面对图1涉及的部分网元的功能进行说明:The functions of some network elements involved in Figure 1 are described below:

AMF负责接入与移动性管理功能,包括用户的注册、可达性、移动性管理、N1/N2接口信令传输、接入鉴权和授权等。例如,vPLMN中的AMF可以负责vPLMN中的接入与移动性管理功能,hPLMN 中的AMF负责hPLMN中的接入与移动性管理功能。AMF is responsible for access and mobility management functions, including user registration, reachability, mobility management, N1/N2 interface signaling transmission, access authentication and authorization, etc. For example, the AMF in the vPLMN can be responsible for the access and mobility management functions in the vPLMN, and the AMF in the hPLMN can be responsible for the access and mobility management functions in the vPLMN. The AMF in the hPLMN is responsible for access and mobility management functions in the hPLMN.

SMF用于实现会话管理,包括提供对UE会话的会话管理(如会话建立、修改、释放)、PCF下发控制策略的执行、UPF的选择和控制、UE的互联网协议(internet protocol,IP)地址分配等功能。例如,vPLMN中的SMF负责vPLMN中的会话管理,hPLMN中的SMF负责hPLMN中的会话管理。SMF is used to implement session management, including providing session management for UE sessions (such as session establishment, modification, and release), execution of control policies issued by PCF, selection and control of UPF, and allocation of Internet protocol (IP) addresses for UE. For example, the SMF in vPLMN is responsible for session management in vPLMN, and the SMF in hPLMN is responsible for session management in hPLMN.

UPF负责核心网的用户面功能,包括提供用户报文的转发、处理、与DN的连接、会话锚点、服务质量(quality of service,QoS)策略执行等用户面功能。例如,vPLMN中的UPF负责vPLMN中的核心网的用户面功能,hPLMN中的SMF负责hPLMN中的核心网的用户面功能。UPF is responsible for the user plane functions of the core network, including forwarding and processing of user messages, connection with DN, session anchor, quality of service (QoS) policy execution, etc. For example, UPF in vPLMN is responsible for the user plane functions of the core network in vPLMN, and SMF in hPLMN is responsible for the user plane functions of the core network in hPLMN.

NRF用于负责网络功能的注册、存储和管理。例如,vPLMN中的NRF负责vPLMN中的网络功能的注册、存储和管理,hPLMN中的NRF负责hPLMN中的网络功能的注册、存储和管理。NRF is responsible for the registration, storage and management of network functions. For example, NRF in vPLMN is responsible for the registration, storage and management of network functions in vPLMN, and NRF in hPLMN is responsible for the registration, storage and management of network functions in hPLMN.

SEPP负责网络与其他网络之间的信令集中安全转发,如提供跨PLMN交互时,控制面接口信令的过滤与策略,以及PLMN内网元拓扑的隐藏。例如,vSEPP负责vPLMN与其他网络(如hPLMN)之间的信令集中安全转发,hSEPP负责hPLMN与其他网络(如vPLMN)之间的信令集中安全转发。SEPP is responsible for the centralized and secure forwarding of signaling between the network and other networks, such as providing filtering and policies for control plane interface signaling when interacting across PLMNs, and hiding of network element topology within the PLMN. For example, vSEPP is responsible for the centralized and secure forwarding of signaling between vPLMN and other networks (such as hPLMN), and hSEPP is responsible for the centralized and secure forwarding of signaling between hPLMN and other networks (such as vPLMN).

NSSF负责为UE确定用于提供服务的网络切片。例如,vPLMN中的NSSF为接入该vPLMN中的UE确定提供服务的网络切片,hPLMN中的NSSF为接入该hPLMN中的UE确定提供服务的网络切片。The NSSF is responsible for determining the network slice used to provide services for the UE. For example, the NSSF in the vPLMN determines the network slice used to provide services for the UE accessing the vPLMN, and the NSSF in the hPLMN determines the network slice used to provide services for the UE accessing the hPLMN.

NEF负责提供对外开放网络数据的功能。例如,vPLMN中的NEF为VPLMN提供开发网络数据的功能,hPLMN中的NEF为hPLMN提供开发网络数据的功能。NEF is responsible for providing the function of opening network data to the outside world. For example, NEF in vPLMN provides the function of developing network data for VPLMN, and NEF in hPLMN provides the function of developing network data for hPLMN.

PCF用于负责策略控制功能,包括负责针对会话、业务流级别进行计费、QoS带宽保障、移动性策略管理、终端设备接入策略等策略控制功能。例如,hPLMN中的PCF负责hPLMN中的策略控制功能。The PCF is responsible for policy control functions, including charging for sessions and service flows, QoS bandwidth guarantee, mobility policy management, terminal device access policy, etc. For example, the PCF in the hPLMN is responsible for policy control functions in the hPLMN.

NSACF负责控制每个网络切片注册的终端设备的数量以及每个网络切片对应的会话的数量。例如,vPLMN中的NSACF可用于控制vPLMN中的网络切换注册的终端设备的数量以及每个网络切片对应的会话的数量。NSACF is responsible for controlling the number of terminal devices registered for each network slice and the number of sessions corresponding to each network slice. For example, NSACF in vPLMN can be used to control the number of terminal devices registered for network switching in vPLMN and the number of sessions corresponding to each network slice.

UDM负责统一数据管理功能,包括对用户进行签约管理、接入授权、鉴权信息生成等。例如,hPLMN中的UDM负责hPLMN中的统一数据管理功能。UDM is responsible for unified data management functions, including user contract management, access authorization, authentication information generation, etc. For example, UDM in hPLMN is responsible for unified data management functions in hPLMN.

AUSF负责鉴权服务功能。例如,hPLMN中的AUSF负责hPLMN中的鉴权服务功能。AUSF is responsible for the authentication service function. For example, AUSF in hPLMN is responsible for the authentication service function in hPLMN.

AF负责提供应用层的服务。例如,hPLMN中的AF负责hPLMN中的应用层的服务。The AF is responsible for providing application layer services. For example, the AF in the hPLMN is responsible for providing application layer services in the hPLMN.

NSSAAF负责对网络切片的认证和授权。例如,hPLMN中的NSSAAF负责hPLMN中的网络切片的认证和授权。NSSAAF is responsible for the authentication and authorization of network slices. For example, NSSAAF in hPLMN is responsible for the authentication and authorization of network slices in hPLMN.

图2示出了另一种应用场景的示意图。图2所示的应用场景也可以视为一种漫游的结构示意图,例如为5G系统(5G system,5GS)与4G演进分组核心网(evolved packet core,EPC)或演进的通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunications system,UMTS)陆地无线接入网(evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access network,E-UTRAN)互操作场景的HR漫游架构示意图。该应用场景包括终端设备的vPLMN和终端设备的hPLMN。FIG2 shows a schematic diagram of another application scenario. The application scenario shown in FIG2 can also be regarded as a roaming structural schematic diagram, for example, a HR roaming architecture schematic diagram of the interoperability scenario between the 5G system (5G system, 5GS) and the 4G evolved packet core (evolved packet core, EPC) or the evolved universal mobile telecommunications system (universal mobile telecommunications system, UMTS) terrestrial radio access network (evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access network, E-UTRAN). The application scenario includes the vPLMN of the terminal device and the hPLMN of the terminal device.

示例性的,vPLMN可以包括4G EPC和5G系统。其中,4G EPC可以包括E-UTRAN、移动管理实体(mobility management entity,MME)、服务网关(service gateway,SGW)等。UE可通过4G接入网E-UTRAN接入4G EPC,如接入MME从而MME可管理该UE。5G系统可以包括下一代RAN(next generation RAN,NG-RAN)、AMF、UPF、v-SMF、v-PCF等。UE可通过NG-RAN接入5G核心网,例如,UE可接入5G核心网网元AMF,从而AMF可管理该UE。Exemplarily, the vPLMN may include a 4G EPC and a 5G system. Among them, the 4G EPC may include E-UTRAN, a mobility management entity (MME), a service gateway (SGW), etc. The UE may access the 4G EPC through the 4G access network E-UTRAN, such as accessing the MME so that the MME can manage the UE. The 5G system may include the next generation RAN (NG-RAN), AMF, UPF, v-SMF, v-PCF, etc. The UE may access the 5G core network through the NG-RAN, for example, the UE may access the 5G core network element AMF, so that the AMF can manage the UE.

在vPLMN的4G EPC中,E-UTRAN可以通过S1-MME接口与MME通信;E-UTRAN可以通过S1-U接口与SGW通信;MME可以通过S11接口与SGW通信。在vPLMN的5G系统中,UE可通过N1接口与AMF通信;NG-RAN通过N2接口与AMF通信;NG-RAN通过N3接口与UPF通信;UPF通过N4接口与v-SMF通信;AMF可以通过N11接口与v-SMF通信;AMF可以通过N15接口与v-PCF通信。vPLMN的4G EPC与5G系统之间可以通过MME与AMF之间的N26接口进行通信。In the 4G EPC of vPLMN, E-UTRAN can communicate with MME through the S1-MME interface; E-UTRAN can communicate with SGW through the S1-U interface; MME can communicate with SGW through the S11 interface. In the 5G system of vPLMN, UE can communicate with AMF through the N1 interface; NG-RAN can communicate with AMF through the N2 interface; NG-RAN can communicate with UPF through the N3 interface; UPF can communicate with v-SMF through the N4 interface; AMF can communicate with v-SMF through the N11 interface; AMF can communicate with v-PCF through the N15 interface. The 4G EPC of vPLMN and the 5G system can communicate through the N26 interface between MME and AMF.

示例性的,hPLMN可以包括集成了UPF及公共数据网络(public data network,PDN)网关(PDNateway,PGW)用户面(PGW-U)功能的网元(如图2中UPF+PGW-U所示,其中“+”表示UPF与PGW-U可以合设)、集成了SMF及PGW控制面(PGW-C)功能的网元(如图2中SMF+PGW-C所示,其中“+”表示SMF与PGW-C可以合设)、h-PCF、集成了归属签约用户服务器(home subscriberserver,HSS)和UDM功能的网元(如图2中HSS+UDM所示,其中“+”表示HSS与UDM可以合 设)等。Exemplarily, the hPLMN may include a network element integrating UPF and public data network (PDN) gateway (PDNateway, PGW) user plane (PGW-U) functions (as shown in UPF+PGW-U in FIG. 2, where "+" indicates that UPF and PGW-U can be co-located), a network element integrating SMF and PGW control plane (PGW-C) functions (as shown in SMF+PGW-C in FIG. 2, where "+" indicates that SMF and PGW-C can be co-located), h-PCF, and a network element integrating home subscriber server (home subscriber server, HSS) and UDM functions (as shown in HSS+UDM in FIG. 2, where "+" indicates that HSS and UDM can be co-located). Assume) etc.

在hPLMN中,UPF+PGW-U可以通过N4接口与SMF+PGW-C通信;SMF+PGW-C可以通过N7接口与h-PCF通信;SMF+PGW-C可以通过N10接口与HSS+UDM通信。In hPLMN, UPF+PGW-U can communicate with SMF+PGW-C through the N4 interface; SMF+PGW-C can communicate with h-PCF through the N7 interface; SMF+PGW-C can communicate with HSS+UDM through the N10 interface.

此外,hPLMN中的UPF+PGW-U可以通过S8-U接口与vPLMN的4G EPC中的SGW通信。hPLMN中的SMF+PGW-C可以通过S8-C接口与vPLMN的4G EPC中的SGW通信。hPLMN中的HSS+UDM可以通过S6a接口与vPLMN的4G EPC中的MME通信。hPLMN中的UPF+PGW-U可以通过N9接口与vPLMN的5G系统中的UPF通信。hPLMN中的SMF+PGW-C可以通过N16接口与vPLMN的5G系统中的v-SMF通信。hPLMN中的h-PCF可以通过N24接口与vPLMN的5G系统中的v-PCF通信。hPLMN中的HSS+UDM可以通过N8接口与vPLMN的5G系统中的AMF通信。In addition, the UPF+PGW-U in the hPLMN can communicate with the SGW in the 4G EPC of the vPLMN through the S8-U interface. The SMF+PGW-C in the hPLMN can communicate with the SGW in the 4G EPC of the vPLMN through the S8-C interface. The HSS+UDM in the hPLMN can communicate with the MME in the 4G EPC of the vPLMN through the S6a interface. The UPF+PGW-U in the hPLMN can communicate with the UPF in the 5G system of the vPLMN through the N9 interface. The SMF+PGW-C in the hPLMN can communicate with the v-SMF in the 5G system of the vPLMN through the N16 interface. The h-PCF in the hPLMN can communicate with the v-PCF in the 5G system of the vPLMN through the N24 interface. The HSS+UDM in the hPLMN can communicate with the AMF in the 5G system of the vPLMN through the N8 interface.

下面对图2涉及的部分网元的功能进行说明:The functions of some network elements involved in Figure 2 are described below:

MME负责演进分组系统(evolved packet system,EPS)中用户的移动性管理。MME is responsible for the mobility management of users in the evolved packet system (EPS).

SGW负责EPS系统中移动中的锚点以及业务包的转发和路由。The SGW is responsible for the forwarding and routing of mobile anchor points and service packets in the EPS system.

PGW负责EPS系统中包检测,传输报文标记及IP地址分配,QOS策略及收费策略等功能。PGW is responsible for packet detection, transmission message marking and IP address allocation, QOS strategy and charging strategy in the EPS system.

SMF+PGW-C主要用于4G网络与5G网络互操作中会话的建立。SMF+PGW-C is mainly used to establish sessions in the interoperation between 4G and 5G networks.

UPF+PGW-U主要用于4G网络与5G网络互操作中用户面报文的转发。UPF+PGW-U is mainly used for forwarding user plane messages in the interoperability between 4G and 5G networks.

应理解,图1和图2所示的应用场景中不限于仅包含图中所示的网元,还可以包含其它未在图中表示的设备,具体在此处不再一一列举。It should be understood that the application scenarios shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are not limited to including only the network elements shown in the figures, but may also include other devices not shown in the figures, which are not listed one by one here.

此外,图1和图2所示的分布形式只是示例性的,不作限定。In addition, the distribution forms shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are merely exemplary and not limiting.

为方便说明,本申请后续将XX网元直接简称为XX,例如,SMF网元简称为SMF。应理解,本申请中所有网元的名称仅仅作为示例,在未来通信中还可以称为其它名称,或者在未来通信中本申请涉及的网元还可以通过其它具有相同功能的实体或者设备等来替代,本申请对此均不作限定。这里做统一说明,后续不再赘述。For the convenience of explanation, this application will refer to XX network element as XX, for example, SMF network element as SMF. It should be understood that the names of all network elements in this application are only examples, and they may be called other names in future communications, or the network elements involved in this application may be replaced by other entities or devices with the same functions in future communications, and this application does not limit this. A unified explanation is given here, and no further description will be given later.

当前的漫游场景仅支持终端设备在拜访运营商网络中不同网络制式的覆盖区域(4G覆盖区域与5G覆盖区域)之间移动时保持业务的连续性,不支持终端设备在归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络不同网络制式的覆盖区域之间移动时保持业务的连续性。例如,终端设备接入拜访运营商网络,当终端设备移动时,由拜访运营商网络的5G覆盖区域移动到归属运营商网络的4G覆盖区域时,终端设备在移动过程中,会断开在拜访运营商网络的连接而重新向归属运营商网络发起注册请求,由此会导致终端设备出现业务中断。基于此,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置,以保证终端设备在归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络不同网络制式的覆盖区域之间移动时保持业务的连续性。此外,本申请提供的通信方法及装置均可以应用在上述图1或图2所示的应用场景中,不予限制。The current roaming scenario only supports the terminal device to maintain service continuity when moving between coverage areas of different network standards in the visited operator network (4G coverage area and 5G coverage area), and does not support the terminal device to maintain service continuity when moving between coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network. For example, when the terminal device accesses the visited operator network, when the terminal device moves from the 5G coverage area of the visited operator network to the 4G coverage area of the home operator network, the terminal device will disconnect from the visited operator network during the movement and re-initiate a registration request to the home operator network, which will cause service interruption of the terminal device. Based on this, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method and device to ensure that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network. In addition, the communication method and device provided in the present application can be applied to the application scenarios shown in Figure 1 or Figure 2 above without limitation.

本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,参阅图3所示,该方法的流程可以包括如下步骤:The present application provides a communication method. Referring to FIG. 3 , the process of the method may include the following steps:

步骤301:第一移动管理网元从第一接入网设备接收第一切换请求消息,第一切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络。Step 301: A first mobility management network element receives a first switching request message from a first access network device, where the first switching request message is used to request switching of a terminal device from a first-standard network in a first operator network to a second-standard network in a second operator network.

第一运营商网络可以为终端设备的拜访运营商网络,第二运营商网络可以为终端设备的归属运营商网络。The first operator network may be a visited operator network of the terminal device, and the second operator network may be a home operator network of the terminal device.

第一制式网络可以为5G网络,第二制式网络可以为4G网络。应理解,在未来的通信中,第一制式网络还可以是6G网络,第二制式网络还可以是5G网络,本申请对此不作限定。在本申请的描述中,仅以第一制式网络为5G网络,第二制式网络为4G网络为例进行举例说明,不作为对本申请的限定。The first standard network may be a 5G network, and the second standard network may be a 4G network. It should be understood that in future communications, the first standard network may also be a 6G network, and the second standard network may also be a 5G network, and this application does not limit this. In the description of this application, only the first standard network is a 5G network, and the second standard network is a 4G network as an example for illustration, which is not a limitation of this application.

第一移动管理网元属于第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络。例如,第一移动管理网元可以为vAMF。The first mobility management network element belongs to a first-standard network in a first operator network. For example, the first mobility management network element may be a vAMF.

需要指出的是,网络共享是运营商间共享移动网络资源的一种方式。网络共享使运营商能够最大限度地提高网络部署,提高整体网络质量。第三代合作伙伴项目(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)系统自标准Rel-5以来可以支持不同类型的网络共享,例如,不同的运营商可以连接到共享的无线接入网,也即接入网共享。目前,共享接入网通常为5G接入网。It should be pointed out that network sharing is a way for operators to share mobile network resources. Network sharing enables operators to maximize network deployment and improve overall network quality. The 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) system can support different types of network sharing since the standard Rel-5. For example, different operators can connect to a shared wireless access network, which is also called access network sharing. Currently, the shared access network is usually a 5G access network.

第一接入网设备为共享接入网设备,终端设备可以通过第一接入网设备接入第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络。也就是说,第一接入网设备是第一运营商网络和第二运营商网络的共享接入网中的接入网设备。The first access network device is a shared access network device, and the terminal device can access the first standard network in the first operator network through the first access network device. In other words, the first access network device is an access network device in the shared access network of the first operator network and the second operator network.

步骤302:第一移动管理网元根据第一切换请求消息,确定允许终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络。 Step 302: The first mobility management network element determines, based on the first switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from a first-standard network in the first operator's network to a second-standard network in the second operator's network.

在一种可选的实施方式中,第一切换请求消息可以包括终端设备当前使用的第一PLMN的标识。相应地,第一移动管理网元根据第一切换请求消息确定允许终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络,方法可以为:第一移动管理网元确定第一PLMN的标识是第二运营商网络的共享PLMN标识,共享PLMN标识用于第二运营商网络的用户接入第一运营商网络的共享接入网设备。In an optional implementation, the first switching request message may include an identifier of the first PLMN currently used by the terminal device. Accordingly, the first mobile management network element determines, based on the first switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network. The method may be: the first mobile management network element determines that the identifier of the first PLMN is a shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network, and the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access the shared access network device of the first operator network.

其中,终端设备当前使用的第一PLMN的标识也可以理解为是终端设备当前选择接入的PLMN的标识,或者也可以理解为终端设备接入共享接入网设备所用的PLMN的标识。第一PLMN的标识可以描述为选择的PLMN的标识(selected PLMN ID)。The identifier of the first PLMN currently used by the terminal device can also be understood as the identifier of the PLMN currently selected by the terminal device for access, or can also be understood as the identifier of the PLMN used by the terminal device to access the shared access network device. The identifier of the first PLMN can be described as the identifier of the selected PLMN (selected PLMN ID).

一种可能的方式中,第一PLMN(即共享PLMN)可以与第一运营商网络的签约用户接入第一运营商网络所使用的PLMN(例如记为第三PLMN)不同。In a possible manner, the first PLMN (ie, the shared PLMN) may be different from the PLMN (eg, recorded as a third PLMN) used by subscribers of the first operator network to access the first operator network.

另一种可能的方式中,第一PLMN也可以与第一运营商网络的签约用户接入第一运营商网络所使用的PLMN(例如记为第三PLMN)相同。In another possible manner, the first PLMN may also be the same as the PLMN (for example, recorded as a third PLMN) used by subscribers of the first operator network to access the first operator network.

示例性的,第一切换请求消息还可以包括终端设备的目标接入网设备的标识(例如,target eNB ID)。进一步地,第一移动管理网元可以根据目标接入网设备的标识,确定目标接入网设备所属的第二PLMN的标识,第二PLMN与第二运营商网络对应。Exemplarily, the first switching request message may also include an identifier of a target access network device of the terminal device (e.g., target eNB ID). Further, the first mobility management network element may determine an identifier of a second PLMN to which the target access network device belongs based on the identifier of the target access network device, and the second PLMN corresponds to the second operator network.

可选的,目标接入网设备的标识可以包括移动国家码(mobile country code,MCC)、移动网络码(mobile network code,MNC)、基站标识符(例如,eNB ID)。由于PLMN ID可以由MCC、MNC组成。因此第一移动管理网元可以根据目标接入网设备的标识中的MCC、MNC可以确定第二PLMN的标识。Optionally, the identifier of the target access network device may include a mobile country code (MCC), a mobile network code (MNC), and a base station identifier (e.g., eNB ID). Since the PLMN ID may be composed of an MCC and an MNC, the first mobile management network element may determine the identifier of the second PLMN based on the MCC and MNC in the identifier of the target access network device.

进而,第一移动管理网元可以通过如下方法确定第一PLMN的标识是第二运营商网络的共享PLMN标识:第一移动管理网元根据第一PLMN的标识和第二PLMN的标识,确定第一PLMN与第二PLMN属于等效PLMN(equal PLMN)。Furthermore, the first mobile management network element can determine that the identifier of the first PLMN is the shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network by the following method: the first mobile management network element determines that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs (equal PLMN) based on the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN.

第一移动管理网元确定第一PLMN的标识和第二PLMN的标识存在等效映射关系,则第一移动管理网元确定第一PLMN与第二PLMN属于等效PLMN。示例性的,第一移动管理网元本地存储了第一PLMN的标识和第二PLMN的标识的等效映射关系。The first mobility management network element determines that there is an equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN, and then the first mobility management network element determines that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs. Exemplarily, the first mobility management network element locally stores the equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN.

步骤303:第一移动管理网元向第二移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息,第二切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络。相应地,第二移动管理网元从第一移动管理网元接收第二切换请求消息。Step 303: The first mobility management network element sends a second handover request message to the second mobility management network element, where the second handover request message is used to request handover of the terminal device from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network. Correspondingly, the second mobility management network element receives the second handover request message from the first mobility management network element.

其中,第二移动管理网元属于第二运营商网络中的第一制式网络。The second mobility management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the second operator network.

第二移动管理网元可以为hAMF。The second mobility management network element may be hAMF.

在一些实施例中,当第一切换请求消息包括第一切换原因值,且第一切换原因值用于指示终端设备从第一制式网络切换到第二制式网络时,第一移动管理网元向第二移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息。In some embodiments, when the first switching request message includes a first switching reason value, and the first switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from a first-standard network to a second-standard network, the first mobility management network element sends a second switching request message to the second mobility management network element.

例如,第一切换原因值可以为系统间切换指示(inter system handover indication),系统间切换指示用于指示终端设备从5G网络切换到4G网络。For example, the first switching reason value may be an inter-system handover indication (inter system handover indication), and the inter-system handover indication is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from a 5G network to a 4G network.

在一种可选的实施方式中,第一移动管理网元可以通过如下方法选择第二移动管理功能网元,进而向第二移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息:In an optional implementation manner, the first mobility management network element may select the second mobility management function network element by the following method, and then send the second handover request message to the second mobility management network element:

方法a1、第一移动管理网元根据本地配置的终端设备当前使用的第一PLMN与第二移动管理网元的对应关系确定第二移动管理网元。Method a1: The first mobility management network element determines the second mobility management network element according to the corresponding relationship between the first PLMN currently used by the terminal device configured locally and the second mobility management network element.

例如,第一移动管理网元本地配置有第一PLMN与一个或多个属于第二运营商网络的移动管理网元的对应关系,第一移动管理网元可以基于第一PLMN从该一个或多个属于第二运营商网络的移动管理网元中确定第二移动管理网元。For example, the first mobile management network element is locally configured with a correspondence between the first PLMN and one or more mobile management network elements belonging to the second operator network. The first mobile management network element can determine the second mobile management network element from the one or more mobile management network elements belonging to the second operator network based on the first PLMN.

方法a2、第一移动管理网元根据第一PLMN的标识从网络存储网元获取第二移动管理网元的标识,其中,网络存储网元中存储有第一PLMN与第二移动管理网元的对应关系。例如,网络存储网元中存储有第一PLMN的标识与第二移动管理网元的标识的对应关系。Method a2: The first mobility management network element obtains the identifier of the second mobility management network element from the network storage network element according to the identifier of the first PLMN, wherein the network storage network element stores the correspondence between the first PLMN and the second mobility management network element. For example, the network storage network element stores the correspondence between the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second mobility management network element.

在第一移动管理网元向第二移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息之前,第一移动管理网元可以根据第一切换请求消息生成第二切换请求消息。Before the first mobility management network element sends the second handover request message to the second mobility management network element, the first mobility management network element may generate the second handover request message according to the first handover request message.

其中,第二切换请求消息可以包括第二PLMN的标识以及第一切换请求消息中除第一PLMN的标识之外的信息。 The second switching request message may include the identifier of the second PLMN and the information in the first switching request message except the identifier of the first PLMN.

例如,第一移动管理功能网元将第一切换请求消息中的第一PLMN的标识替换为第二PLMN的标识得到第二切换请求消息。For example, the first mobility management function network element replaces the identifier of the first PLMN in the first switching request message with the identifier of the second PLMN to obtain the second switching request message.

一种示例中,第二切换请求消息可以包含第二PLMN的标识、目标接入网设备的标识和第一切换原因值。In an example, the second switching request message may include an identifier of the second PLMN, an identifier of the target access network device, and a first switching reason value.

在一种可选的实施方式中,第二切换请求消息还可以包括第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示第二移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息转发给第一移动管理网元。In an optional implementation, the second handover request message may further include first indication information, where the first indication information is used to instruct the second mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the first mobility management network element.

可选的,第一指示信息用于第二移动管理网元确定在接收到第二切换请求消息之前,终端设备通过共享接入网设备发送用于请求将终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络的消息。Optionally, the first indication information is used by the second mobile management network element to determine that before receiving the second switching request message, the terminal device sends a message through the shared access network device to request to switch the terminal device from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network.

步骤304:第二移动管理网元根据第二切换请求消息,向第三移动管理网元发送第三切换请求消息。Step 304: The second mobility management network element sends a third handover request message to the third mobility management network element according to the second handover request message.

其中,第三切换请求消息可以用于请求将终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络。The third switching request message may be used to request switching of the terminal device from a first-standard network in the first operator network to a second-standard network in the second operator network.

其中,第三移动管理网元属于第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络。The third mobility management network element belongs to the second-standard network in the second operator's network.

例如,第三移动管理网元可以是hMME。For example, the third mobility management network element may be hMME.

示例性的,当第二切换请求消息包括第一切换原因值,且第一切换原因值用于指示终端设备从第一制式网络切换到第二制式网络时,第二移动管理网元向第三移动管理网元发送第三切换请求消息。Exemplarily, when the second switching request message includes a first switching reason value, and the first switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from a first-standard network to a second-standard network, the second mobility management network element sends a third switching request message to the third mobility management network element.

进一步地,第三移动管理网元在接收到第二移动管理网元发送的第三切换请求消息后,可以与第二运营商网络中的其他网元(例如SGW、SMF+PGW-C、UPF+PGW-U、hPCF等网元)进行交互,完成第二运营商网络的公共数据网络(public data network,PDN)连接(connection)建立。Furthermore, after receiving the third switching request message sent by the second mobile management network element, the third mobile management network element can interact with other network elements in the second operator network (such as SGW, SMF+PGW-C, UPF+PGW-U, hPCF and other network elements) to complete the establishment of the public data network (public data network, PDN) connection of the second operator network.

进一步可选地,第三移动管理网元向第二移动管理网元发送第一切换响应消息,第一切换响应消息可以用于响应第三切换请求消息。Further optionally, the third mobility management network element sends a first handover response message to the second mobility management network element, and the first handover response message can be used to respond to the third handover request message.

示例性的,第一切换响应消息可以包括以下一项或多项信息:原因(cause)、目标侧到源侧透明容器(target to source transparent container)、EPS承载建立列表(EPS bearer setup list)、地址和隧道端点标识符(addresses and tunnel endpoint identifiers(TEIDs))。Exemplarily, the first switching response message may include one or more of the following information: cause, target to source transparent container, EPS bearer setup list, addresses and tunnel endpoint identifiers (TEIDs).

其中,原因可以是第三移动管理网元从第二运营商网络的接入网设备侧(即目标接入网设备)收到的原因,该原因可以用于指示接入成功或接入失败。例如,原因可以表明接入网设备完成了无线资源准备,或同意终端设备从源侧切换到目标侧,或该原因可以表明未完成无线资源准备,或不同意终端设备的切换。The reason may be a reason received by the third mobility management network element from the access network device side (i.e., the target access network device) of the second operator's network, and the reason may be used to indicate access success or access failure. For example, the reason may indicate that the access network device has completed wireless resource preparation, or agrees to switch the terminal device from the source side to the target side, or the reason may indicate that wireless resource preparation is not completed, or the switching of the terminal device is not agreed.

其中,目标侧到源侧透明容器可以包括目标侧接入网设备支持的一些特性,如用于源侧检索与目标侧对应的特性。The target-side to-source-side transparent container may include some characteristics supported by the target-side access network device, such as a characteristic used by the source side to retrieve the corresponding characteristic on the target side.

其中,EPS bearer setup list指的是第二运营商网络侧根据协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)会话信息建立的EPS bearer List。其中,PDU会话信息具体可以是前述切换请求消息中携带的信息。The EPS bearer setup list refers to the EPS bearer list established by the second operator network side according to the protocol data unit (PDU) session information. The PDU session information may specifically be the information carried in the aforementioned handover request message.

addresses and TEIDs可以包括用于建立间接数据转发路径的SGW addresses以及第二运营商的第二制式网络侧建立的用于数据转发的用户面数据隧道的TEIDs。The addresses and TEIDs may include SGW addresses used to establish an indirect data forwarding path and TEIDs of the user plane data tunnel established on the second-standard network side of the second operator for data forwarding.

进一步可选地,第二移动管理网元向第一移动管理网元发送第二切换响应消息,第二切换响应消息可以用于响应第二切换请求消息。第二切换响应消息可以包含前述第一切换响应消息中的信息。Further optionally, the second mobility management network element sends a second handover response message to the first mobility management network element, and the second handover response message may be used to respond to the second handover request message. The second handover response message may include the information in the aforementioned first handover response message.

进一步可选地,第二移动管理网元根据第二切换响应消息中的信息建立连接数据转发隧道,并向第一接入网设备发送第三切换响应消息,第三切换响应消息用于响应第一切换请求消息。Further optionally, the second mobility management network element establishes a connection data forwarding tunnel according to information in the second switching response message, and sends a third switching response message to the first access network device, where the third switching response message is used to respond to the first switching request message.

进一步地,第一接入网设备向终端设备发送切换命令,以触发终端设备向目标接入网设备发起切换,以使终端设备重配到目标接入网设备。Furthermore, the first access network device sends a switching command to the terminal device to trigger the terminal device to initiate a switch to the target access network device, so that the terminal device is reconfigured to the target access network device.

可选的,当第三切换响应消息中包含间接数据转发路径的信息时,第一接入网设备将接收到的数据通过间接转发路径转发给目标接入网设备。Optionally, when the third switching response message includes information about the indirect data forwarding path, the first access network device forwards the received data to the target access network device through the indirect forwarding path.

在终端设备切换到目标接入网设备之后,终端设备可以向第三移动管理网元发送切换完成通知消息,切换完成通知消息用于通知终端设备已切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络。After the terminal device switches to the target access network device, the terminal device may send a switching completion notification message to the third mobility management network element, where the switching completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that it has switched to the second-standard network in the second operator's network.

第三移动管理网元向第二移动管理网元发送该切换完成通知消息,进一步地,第二移动管理网元根据第二切换请求消息包括的第一指示信息,向第一移动管理网元发送该切换完成通知消息。The third mobility management network element sends the switching completion notification message to the second mobility management network element. Further, the second mobility management network element sends the switching completion notification message to the first mobility management network element according to the first indication information included in the second switching request message.

可选的,切换完通知消息中可以携带重定向完成通知指示(relocation complete notification indication),该指示可以用于指示终端设备成功切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络。第一移动管理网元可以基 于该指示通知会话管理网元释放第一运营商网络中的PDU会话。Optionally, the handover completion notification message may carry a relocation complete notification indication, which may be used to indicate that the terminal device has successfully switched to the second standard network in the second operator network. The indication notifies the session management network element to release the PDU session in the first operator network.

在一种示例中,第一移动管理网元可以向会话管理网元发送释放PDU会话的请求。第一移动管理网元在接收到会话管理网元的PDU会话释放完成的消息后,第一移动管理网元可以向第二移动管理网元发送切换完成确认消息,切换完成确认消息指示终端设备在第一运营商网络的会话已释放完成。In one example, the first mobility management network element may send a request to release the PDU session to the session management network element. After receiving the message of the completion of the PDU session release from the session management network element, the first mobility management network element may send a switching completion confirmation message to the second mobility management network element, and the switching completion confirmation message indicates that the session of the terminal device in the first operator network has been released.

切换完成确认消息可以携带重定向完成确认指示(relocation complete ack indicaiton),该指示表明第一运营商网络侧完成了切换流程。The switching completion confirmation message may carry a relocation complete ack indication, which indicates that the switching process has been completed on the first operator network side.

进一步地,第二移动管理网元向第三移动管理网元发送该切换完成确认消息。Further, the second mobility management network element sends the switching completion confirmation message to the third mobility management network element.

通过上述通信方法,可以将终端设备在拜访运营商网络发起的不同制式间的切换请求转换成两步:归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络间同一制式间的切换和归属运营商网络的不同制式间的切换,后续可以保证终端设备在归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络不同网络制式的覆盖区域之间移动时保持业务的连续性。Through the above communication method, the switching request between different standards initiated by the terminal device in the visited operator network can be converted into two steps: switching between the same standard between the home operator network and the visited operator network and switching between different standards of the home operator network. Subsequently, it can be ensured that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving between the coverage areas of different network standards of the home operator network and the visited operator network.

基于图3所示的实施例,图4示出了一种通信方法的示例,在该示例中以第一运营商网络为终端设备的拜访运营商网络,第二运营商网络为终端设备的归属运营商网络,第一制式网络为5G网络,第二制式网络为4G网络,第一接入网设备为共享RAN,第一移动管理网元为vAMF,第二移动管理网元为hAMF,第三移动管理网元为hMME为例说明。在该示例中,UE从共享5G网络切换到归属运营商网络中的4G网络时,由vAMF判断允许该UE向归属运营商网络中的4G网络发起切换,并将切换请求转发到归属运营商网络中的hAMF,由hAMF选择合适的hMME,并做数据转发。也即,该示例基于vAMF对切换请求做鉴权,由hAMF重配置UE上下文。示例性的,该示例的流程可以包括如下步骤:Based on the embodiment shown in Figure 3, Figure 4 shows an example of a communication method, in which the first operator network is the visited operator network of the terminal device, the second operator network is the home operator network of the terminal device, the first standard network is a 5G network, the second standard network is a 4G network, the first access network device is a shared RAN, the first mobile management network element is vAMF, the second mobile management network element is hAMF, and the third mobile management network element is hMME. In this example, when the UE switches from the shared 5G network to the 4G network in the home operator network, the vAMF determines whether the UE is allowed to initiate a switch to the 4G network in the home operator network, and forwards the switching request to the hAMF in the home operator network, and the hAMF selects a suitable hMME and forwards data. That is, this example authenticates the switching request based on the vAMF, and the hAMF reconfigures the UE context. Exemplarily, the process of this example may include the following steps:

步骤401:共享RAN向vAMF发送第一切换请求消息。Step 401: The shared RAN sends a first handover request message to the vAMF.

其中,第一切换请求消息用于请求将UE从拜访运营商网络的5G网络切换到归属运营商网络的4G网络。Among them, the first switching request message is used to request to switch the UE from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.

第一切换请求消息中可以包括target eNB ID和第一切换原因值(例如,inter system handover indication)。具体的,target eNB ID和第一切换原因值可以参见前述描述,此处不再赘述。The first handover request message may include a target eNB ID and a first handover reason value (e.g., inter system handover indication). Specifically, the target eNB ID and the first handover reason value may refer to the aforementioned description and will not be described in detail here.

第一切换请求消息中还可以包括UE当前使用的第一PLMN的标识。第一PLMN的标识可以参见前述描述,此处不再赘述。The first handover request message may also include an identifier of a first PLMN currently used by the UE. The identifier of the first PLMN can refer to the above description and will not be described in detail here.

步骤402:vAMF根据第一切换请求消息确定允许UE从拜访运营商网络的5G网络切换到归属运营商网络的4G网络。Step 402: The vAMF determines, based on the first switching request message, that the UE is allowed to switch from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.

具体地,vAMF根据第一切换请求消息确定允许UE从拜访运营商网络的5G网络切换到归属运营商网络的4G网络的方法,可以参见前述第一移动管理网元根据第一切换请求消息,确定允许终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络的方法,此处不再赘述。Specifically, vAMF determines the method for allowing the UE to switch from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network based on the first switching request message. Please refer to the method for the aforementioned first mobile management network element to determine the method for allowing the terminal device to switch from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network based on the first switching request message. It will not be repeated here.

步骤403:vAMF向hAMF发送第二切换请求消息。Step 403: vAMF sends a second switching request message to hAMF.

其中,第二切换请求消息用于请求将UE从拜访运营商网络的5G网络切换到归属运营商网络的4G网络。The second switching request message is used to request to switch the UE from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.

第二切换请求消息中可以包含target eNB ID、第一切换原因值(inter system handover indication)、第二PLMN的标识和第一指示信息。The second handover request message may include the target eNB ID, the first handover reason value (inter system handover indication), the identifier of the second PLMN and the first indication information.

第一指示信息的描述可以参见前述描述,此处不再赘述。The description of the first indication information can refer to the above description and will not be repeated here.

步骤404:hAMF根据第二切换请求消息,向hMME发送第三切换消息。Step 404: hAMF sends a third handover message to hMME according to the second handover request message.

其中,第三切换请求消息用于请求将UE从拜访运营商网络的5G网络切换到归属运营商网络的4G网络。Among them, the third switching request message is used to request to switch the UE from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.

示例性的,当第二切换请求消息包括第一切换原因值,且第一切换原因值用于指示UE从5G网络切换到4G网络时,hAMF向hMME元发送第三切换请求消息。Exemplarily, when the second switching request message includes the first switching reason value, and the first switching reason value is used to indicate that the UE switches from the 5G network to the 4G network, the hAMF sends a third switching request message to the hMME element.

可选的,hAMF可以根据第二切换请求消息中的target eNB ID以第一指示信息选择一个hMME。Optionally, the hAMF may select a hMME with the first indication information based on the target eNB ID in the second switching request message.

步骤405:hMME完成归属运营商网络切换准备。Step 405: hMME completes the home operator network handover preparation.

例如,hMME与归属运营商网络中的其他网元(如SGW,SMF+PGW-C,UPF+PGW-U,HPCF等)网元进行交互,完成归属运营商网络侧的PDN connection建立。For example, hMME interacts with other network elements in the home operator network (such as SGW, SMF+PGW-C, UPF+PGW-U, HPCF, etc.) to complete the establishment of PDN connection on the home operator network side.

步骤406:hMME向hAMF发送第一切换响应消息,第一切换响应消息用于响应第三切换请求消息。Step 406: hMME sends a first handover response message to hAMF, where the first handover response message is used to respond to the third handover request message.

第一切换响应消息可以包括下一项或多项信息:原因(cause)、目标侧到源侧透传容器(target to  source transparent container)、EPS承载建立列表(EPS bearer setup list)、地址和隧道端点标识符(addresses and tunnel endpoint identifiers(TEIDs))。具体可以参见前述相关描述,此处不再赘述。The first switching response message may include one or more of the following information: cause, target to source transparent transmission container, source transparent container), EPS bearer setup list (EPS bearer setup list), addresses and tunnel endpoint identifiers (addresses and tunnel endpoint identifiers (TEIDs)). For details, please refer to the above related description, which will not be repeated here.

步骤407:hAMF向vAMF发送第二切换响应消息。Step 407: hAMF sends a second handover response message to vAMF.

其中,第二切换响应消息用于响应第二切换请求消息。The second switching response message is used to respond to the second switching request message.

第二切换响应消息中可以包含第一切换响应消息中的信息。The second handover response message may include the information in the first handover response message.

步骤408:vAMF根据第二切换响应消息中的信息建立连接数据转发隧道,并向共享RAN发送第三切换响应消息。Step 408: The vAMF establishes a connection data forwarding tunnel according to the information in the second handover response message, and sends a third handover response message to the shared RAN.

其中,第三切换响应消息用于响应第一切换请求消息。The third switching response message is used to respond to the first switching request message.

步骤409:共享RAN向UE发送切换命令。Step 409: The shared RAN sends a handover command to the UE.

其中,该切换命令可以指示UE切换到目标eNB。The handover command may instruct the UE to handover to the target eNB.

可选的,若第三切换响应消息中包含间接数据转发路径的信息,则共享RAN将接收的下行数据通过间接数据转发路径转发的目标eNB。Optionally, if the third handover response message includes information about the indirect data forwarding path, the shared RAN forwards the received downlink data to the target eNB through the indirect data forwarding path.

步骤410:UE切换到归属运营商网络中的目标eNB后,向hMME发送切换完成通知消息。Step 410: After the UE switches to the target eNB in the home operator's network, it sends a switching completion notification message to the hMME.

其中,切换完成通知消息用于通知UE已切换到归属运营商网络中的4G网络。The switching completion notification message is used to notify the UE that it has switched to the 4G network in the home operator's network.

步骤411:hMME向hAMF发送切换完成通知消息。Step 411: hMME sends a handover completion notification message to hAMF.

步骤412:hAMF根据第二切换请求消息中包含的第一指示信息,将接收到hMME的切换完成通知消息转发给vAMF。Step 412: hAMF forwards the handover completion notification message received from hMME to vAMF according to the first indication information included in the second handover request message.

可选的,切换完通知消息中携带重定向完成通知指示(relocation complete notification indication),该指示可以用于指示UE成功切换到归属运营商网络中的4G网络。vAMF可以基于该指示通知vSMF释放拜访运营商网络中的PDU会话。Optionally, the handover completion notification message carries a relocation complete notification indication, which can be used to indicate that the UE has successfully switched to the 4G network in the home operator network. Based on this indication, the vAMF can notify the vSMF to release the PDU session in the visited operator network.

步骤413:vAMF向vSMF发送释放PDU会话的请求,并在接收到vSMF的PDU会话释放完成消息后,向hAMF发送切换完成确认消息。Step 413: vAMF sends a request to release the PDU session to vSMF, and after receiving the PDU session release completion message from vSMF, sends a switching completion confirmation message to hAMF.

其中,切换完成确认消息可以指示UE在拜访运营商网络的会话已释放完成。The handover completion confirmation message may indicate that the session of the UE in the visited operator network has been released.

其中,切换完成确认消息可以携带重定向完成确认指示(relocation complete ack indicaiton),该指示表明拜访运营商网络侧完成了切换流程。Among them, the switching completion confirmation message can carry a redirection completion confirmation indication (relocation complete ack indication), which indicates that the switching process has been completed on the visited operator network side.

步骤414:hAMF向hMME发送切换完成确认消息。Step 414: hAMF sends a handover completion confirmation message to hMME.

上述方法,通过vAMF将接收到UE从共享5G网络切换到归属运营商4G网络的切换请求消息转发到hAMF,由hAMF辅助将UE从共享5G网络切换到归属运营商4G网络时5G网络与4G网络之间切换信令的交互,实现了在共享5G网络与归属运营商4G网络之间不能直接通信的场景下,保证UE在从拜访运营商网络的5G网络到归属运营商网络的4G网络移动时保持业务的连续性。In the above method, vAMF forwards the handover request message received when the UE switches from the shared 5G network to the 4G network of the home operator to hAMF, and hAMF assists in the interaction of handover signaling between the 5G network and the 4G network when the UE switches from the shared 5G network to the 4G network of the home operator. In the scenario where the shared 5G network and the 4G network of the home operator cannot communicate directly, the UE is guaranteed to maintain service continuity when moving from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.

除上述通信方法外,本申请实施例还提供了图5和图6所示的通信方法,可以保证UE在从拜访运营商网络的5G网络到归属运营商网络的4G网络移动时保持业务的连续性。In addition to the above-mentioned communication method, the embodiment of the present application also provides the communication method shown in Figures 5 and 6, which can ensure that the UE maintains service continuity when moving from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.

在图5所示的示例中,UE从共享5G网络切换到归属运营商网络中的4G网络时,vAMF根据切换请求的类型,判断该vAMF支持该类型切换,并将该类型切换转发到对应的具有代理(proxy)功能的hAMF上,由hAMF转发vAMF与hMME之间的切换相关消息,实现UE从共享5G网络切换到归属运营商4G网络的过程中保持业务的连续性。示例性的,该示例的流程可以包括如下步骤:In the example shown in FIG5 , when the UE switches from the shared 5G network to the 4G network in the home operator network, the vAMF determines that the vAMF supports this type of switching based on the type of switching request, and forwards this type of switching to the corresponding hAMF with a proxy function, and the hAMF forwards the switching-related messages between the vAMF and the hMME, so as to achieve service continuity during the UE switching from the shared 5G network to the home operator 4G network. Exemplarily, the process of this example may include the following steps:

步骤501:共享RAN向vAMF发送的切换请求消息1。Step 501: Sharing the handover request message 1 sent by the RAN to the vAMF.

其中,切换请求消息1用于请求将UE从拜访运营商网络的5G网络切换到归属运营商网络的4G网络。Among them, the switching request message 1 is used to request to switch the UE from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.

切换请求消息1中携带的信息可以包括target eNB ID和第一切换原因值(例如,inter system handover indication)。具体的,target eNB ID和第一切换原因值可以参见前述描述,此处不再赘述。The information carried in the handover request message 1 may include a target eNB ID and a first handover reason value (e.g., inter system handover indication). Specifically, the target eNB ID and the first handover reason value may refer to the aforementioned description and will not be described in detail here.

切换请求消息1中还可以包括UE当前使用的第一PLMN的标识。第一PLMN的标识可以参见前述描述,此处不再赘述。The handover request message 1 may also include an identifier of the first PLMN currently used by the UE. The identifier of the first PLMN can refer to the above description and will not be described again here.

可选的,切换请求消息1中还可以包括源侧到目标侧透传容器(source to target transparent container)。其中,源侧到目标侧透传容器可以包含源侧共享RAN的信息,比如:需要进行数据转发的数据流(Qos flow)或无线承载信息。源侧到目标侧透传容器会透传给目标RAN侧,用于目标RAN根据源侧的信息,分配或配置目标侧无线承载资源。Optionally, the handover request message 1 may also include a source to target transparent container. The source to target transparent container may include information about the source side shared RAN, such as: data flow (QoS flow) or radio bearer information that needs to be forwarded. The source to target transparent container will be transparently transmitted to the target RAN side, and is used by the target RAN to allocate or configure the target side radio bearer resources according to the information on the source side.

步骤502:vAMF根据切换请求消息1确定允许UE从拜访运营商网络的5G网络切换到归属运营 商网络的4G网络。Step 502: The vAMF determines, based on the handover request message 1, that the UE is allowed to switch from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 5G network of the home operator network. The 4G network of the commercial network.

具体地,vAMF根据切换请求消息1确定允许UE从拜访运营商网络的5G网络切换到归属运营商网络的4G网络的方法,与前述第一移动管理网元根据第一切换请求消息,确定允许终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络的方法类似,可以相互参见,此处不再详细描述。Specifically, the method in which vAMF determines, based on the switching request message 1, that the UE is allowed to switch from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network is similar to the method in which the aforementioned first mobile management network element determines, based on the first switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network. They can refer to each other and are not described in detail here.

步骤503:vAMF根据切换请求消息1生成切换请求消息2(如重定向请求relocation request),并将切换请求消息2封装在N14容器(container)中,向hAMF发送N14消息1。Step 503: vAMF generates a switching request message 2 (such as a redirection request relocation request) based on the switching request message 1, encapsulates the switching request message 2 in an N14 container, and sends the N14 message 1 to the hAMF.

其中,N14消息1中包括该N14容器。The N14 message 1 includes the N14 container.

其中,切换请求消息2中可以包含target eNB ID、第二PLMN的标识和第一切换原因值。Among them, the switching request message 2 may include the target eNB ID, the identifier of the second PLMN and the first switching reason value.

可选的,切换请求消息2中还可以包含source to target transparent container和/或MME UE上下文(context)。Optionally, the handover request message 2 may also include source to target transparent container and/or MME UE context.

示例性的,N14消息1中还可以包括target ID和指示信息1(如前向指示(forward_indication))。Exemplarily, the N14 message 1 may also include a target ID and indication information 1 (such as a forward indication (forward_indication)).

其中,指示信息1可以指示hAMF接收到该N14消息的具体动作。例如,指示信息1可以指示hAMF按照target ID选择hMME,并将N14 container中的数据转发到选择的hMME。Among them, indication information 1 can indicate the specific action of hAMF after receiving the N14 message. For example, indication information 1 can instruct hAMF to select hMME according to target ID and forward the data in N14 container to the selected hMME.

可选的,该指示信息1也可以指示当hAMF收到hMME发送的消息后,封装到N14 container中并转发给vAMF。Optionally, the indication information 1 may also indicate that when hAMF receives the message sent by hMME, it encapsulates it into the N14 container and forwards it to vAMF.

步骤504:hAMF接收到vAMF发送的N14消息后,根据N14消息选择hMME,并将N14 container中的切换请求消息2转发到hMME。Step 504: After hAMF receives the N14 message sent by vAMF, it selects hMME according to the N14 message and forwards the switching request message 2 in the N14 container to hMME.

示例性的,hAMF可以根据N14消息1中的target eNB ID和forward_indication选择hMME。Exemplarily, hAMF may select hMME based on the target eNB ID and forward_indication in N14 message 1.

步骤505:hMME完成归属运营商网络切换准备。Step 505: hMME completes the home operator network handover preparation.

例如,hMME与归属运营商网络中的其他网元(如SGW,SMF+PGW-C,UPF+PGW-U,HPCF等)网元进行交互,完成归属运营商网络侧的PDN connection建立。For example, hMME interacts with other network elements in the home operator network (such as SGW, SMF+PGW-C, UPF+PGW-U, HPCF, etc.) to complete the establishment of PDN connection on the home operator network side.

步骤506:hMME向hAMF发送切换响应消息1,切换响应消息1用于响应hAMF发送的切换请求消息2。Step 506: hMME sends a handover response message 1 to hAMF. The handover response message 1 is used to respond to the handover request message 2 sent by hAMF.

步骤507:hAMF将接收到hMME的切换响应消息1封装到N14容器,并向vAMF发送N14消息2。Step 507: hAMF encapsulates the handover response message 1 received from hMME into an N14 container, and sends an N14 message 2 to vAMF.

其中,N14消息2中包含该N14容器。The N14 message 2 includes the N14 container.

可选的,hAMF根据N14消息1中的指示信息1将接收到hMME的切换响应消息1封装到N14容器,并向vAMF发送N14消息2。Optionally, hAMF encapsulates the switching response message 1 received from hMME into an N14 container according to the indication information 1 in the N14 message 1, and sends an N14 message 2 to vAMF.

步骤508:vAMF解析N14消息2,得到切换响应消息1,并根据切换响应消息1建立间接数据转发隧道,并将向共享RAN发送切换响应消息2。Step 508: The vAMF parses the N14 message 2, obtains the switching response message 1, establishes an indirect data forwarding tunnel according to the switching response message 1, and sends the switching response message 2 to the shared RAN.

其中,切换响应消息2用于响应切换请求消息1。The switching response message 2 is used to respond to the switching request message 1.

步骤509:共享RAN向UE发送切换命令。Step 509: The shared RAN sends a handover command to the UE.

其中,该切换命令可以指示UE切换到目标eNB。The handover command may instruct the UE to handover to the target eNB.

可选的,若切换响应消息2中包含间接数据转发路径的信息,则共享RAN将接收的下行数据通过间接数据转发路径转发的目标eNB。Optionally, if the handover response message 2 includes information about the indirect data forwarding path, the shared RAN forwards the received downlink data to the target eNB through the indirect data forwarding path.

步骤510:UE切换到归属运营商网络中的目标eNB后,向hMME发送切换完成通知消息。Step 510: After the UE switches to the target eNB in the home operator's network, it sends a switching completion notification message to the hMME.

其中,切换完成通知消息用于通知UE已切换到归属运营商网络中的4G网络。The switching completion notification message is used to notify the UE that it has switched to the 4G network in the home operator's network.

步骤511:hMME向hAMF发送切换完成通知消息。Step 511: hMME sends a handover completion notification message to hAMF.

步骤512:hAMF根据N14消息1中的指示信息1,将接收到的hMME的切换完成通知消息封装在N14容器中,并向vAMF发送N14消息3,N14消息3中包含该N14容器。Step 512: hAMF encapsulates the received handover completion notification message of hMME in an N14 container according to indication information 1 in N14 message 1, and sends N14 message 3 to vAMF, where N14 message 3 includes the N14 container.

步骤513:vAMF解析N14消息3得到切换完成通知消息后,向vSMF发送释放PDU会话的请求。vAMF在接收到vSMF的PDU会话释放完成的消息后,生成切换完成确认消息,并将切换完成确认消息封装到N14容器中,向hAMF发送N14消息4,N14消息4中包含该N14容器。Step 513: After vAMF parses N14 message 3 to obtain the handover completion notification message, it sends a request to release the PDU session to vSMF. After receiving the PDU session release completion message from vSMF, vAMF generates a handover completion confirmation message, encapsulates the handover completion confirmation message into an N14 container, and sends N14 message 4 to hAMF, which includes the N14 container.

其中,切换完成确认消息可以指示UE在拜访运营商网络的会话已释放完成。The handover completion confirmation message may indicate that the session of the UE in the visited operator network has been released.

其中,切换完成确认消息可以携带重定向完成确认指示(relocation complete ack indicaiton),该指示表明拜访运营商网络侧完成了切换流程。Among them, the switching completion confirmation message can carry a redirection completion confirmation indication (relocation complete ack indication), which indicates that the switching process has been completed on the visited operator network side.

步骤514:hAMF解析N14消息4中的N14容器,将N14容器中的切换完成确认消息转发给hMME。 Step 514: hAMF parses the N14 container in N14 message 4, and forwards the handover completion confirmation message in the N14 container to hMME.

通过上述方法,vAMF将接收到的共享RAN的切换请求消息1转换成需要发送到hMME的切换请求消息2并封装在N14容器中,同时给hAMF提供一个选择hMME的指示,hAMF接收到消息后直接将N14容器中的消息转发到hMME,并将接收到的hMME的回复消息封装在N14容器中,转发到vAMF。hAMF仅作为一个透传vAMF与hMME之间消息的代理。上述方法实现了在共享5G网络与归属运营商4G网络之间不能直接通信的场景下,保证UE在从拜访运营商网络的5G网络到归属运营商网络的4G网络移动时保持业务的连续性。Through the above method, vAMF converts the received switching request message 1 of the shared RAN into a switching request message 2 that needs to be sent to hMME and encapsulates it in the N14 container, and at the same time provides hAMF with an indication of selecting hMME. After receiving the message, hAMF directly forwards the message in the N14 container to hMME, and encapsulates the received reply message of hMME in the N14 container and forwards it to vAMF. hAMF only acts as an agent for transparent transmission of messages between vAMF and hMME. The above method ensures that the UE maintains service continuity when moving from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network in a scenario where direct communication is not possible between the shared 5G network and the home operator's 4G network.

在图6所示的示例中,示出了当UE在共享RAN接入时,其移动性管理的上下文保存在hAMF中,切换到归属运营商4G网络时的切换方案。该方案是通过vAMF作为proxy,传递共享RAN与hAMF之间的消息。UE是否允许切换到归属4G网络初步是由hAMF做鉴权的。vAMF在接收到共享RAN发送的消息后,根据该消息的selected PLMN判断该消息是属于哪个网络的UE,直接转发到本地配置的管理该UE的PLMN中的hAMF上。由hAMF判断是否允许该UE做此类切换并与hMME交互完成UE从共享RAN切换到归属运营商的4G网络。示例性的,该示例的流程可以包括如下步骤:In the example shown in Figure 6, a switching scheme is shown when the UE is accessed in the shared RAN and its mobility management context is saved in the hAMF and switched to the home operator's 4G network. This scheme uses vAMF as a proxy to transmit messages between the shared RAN and hAMF. Whether the UE is allowed to switch to the home 4G network is initially authenticated by the hAMF. After receiving the message sent by the shared RAN, the vAMF determines which network the UE belongs to based on the selected PLMN of the message, and forwards it directly to the hAMF in the locally configured PLMN that manages the UE. The hAMF determines whether the UE is allowed to make such a switch and interacts with the hMME to complete the UE's switch from the shared RAN to the home operator's 4G network. Exemplarily, the process of this example may include the following steps:

步骤601:共享RAN向vAMF发送的切换请求消息1。Step 601: Sharing the handover request message 1 sent by the RAN to the vAMF.

其中,切换请求消息1用于请求将UE从拜访运营商网络的5G网络切换到归属运营商网络的4G网络。Among them, the switching request message 1 is used to request to switch the UE from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.

切换请求消息1中携带的信息可以包括target eNB ID和第一切换原因值(例如,inter system handover indication)。具体的,target eNB ID和第一切换原因值可以参见前述描述,此处不再赘述。The information carried in the handover request message 1 may include a target eNB ID and a first handover reason value (e.g., inter system handover indication). Specifically, the target eNB ID and the first handover reason value may refer to the aforementioned description and will not be described in detail here.

切换请求消息1中还可以包括UE当前使用的第一PLMN的标识(例如selected PLMN)。第一PLMN的标识可以参见前述描述,此处不再赘述。The handover request message 1 may also include an identifier of the first PLMN currently used by the UE (e.g., selected PLMN). The identifier of the first PLMN can be found in the above description and will not be repeated here.

步骤602:vAMF将切换请求消息1封装到N14容器中,向预配置的第一PLMN的标识对应的hAMF发送N14消息1。Step 602: The vAMF encapsulates the switching request message 1 into the N14 container, and sends the N14 message 1 to the hAMF corresponding to the pre-configured first PLMN identifier.

其中,N14消息1中包含该N14容器。The N14 message 1 includes the N14 container.

示例性的,vAMF中预配置了共享PLMN的标识与AMF的对应关系。例如,共享PLMN的标识为46022,则对应hAMF1;共享PLMN的标识为46023,则对应hAMF2。Exemplarily, the vAMF preconfigures the correspondence between the shared PLMN identifier and the AMF. For example, if the shared PLMN identifier is 46022, it corresponds to hAMF1; if the shared PLMN identifier is 46023, it corresponds to hAMF2.

可选的,vAMF确定第一PLMN标识是归属运营商网络的共享PLMN标识,则向预配置的第一PLMN的标识对应的hAMF发送N14消息1。Optionally, if the vAMF determines that the first PLMN identifier is a shared PLMN identifier of the home operator network, the N14 message 1 is sent to the hAMF corresponding to the pre-configured first PLMN identifier.

其中,vAMF确定第一PLMN标识是归属运营商网络的共享PLMN标识的方法可以参见图3所示的实施例中涉及的相关方法,此处不再详细描述。Among them, the method for vAMF to determine that the first PLMN identifier is a shared PLMN identifier of the home operator network can refer to the relevant method involved in the embodiment shown in Figure 3, and will not be described in detail here.

步骤603:hAMF解析N14消息1,得到N14容器中的切换请求消息1,并根据切换请求消息1确定允许UE从拜访运营商网络的5G网络切换到归属运营商网络的4G网络。Step 603: hAMF parses N14 message 1, obtains the switching request message 1 in the N14 container, and determines, based on the switching request message 1, that the UE is allowed to switch from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network.

其中,hAMF根据切换请求消息1确定允许UE从拜访运营商网络的5G网络切换到归属运营商网络的4G网络的方法,与图3所示的实施例中第一移动管理网元根据第一切换请求消息,确定允许终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络的方法类似,可以相互参见,此处不再详细描述。Among them, the method in which hAMF determines, based on the switching request message 1, that the UE is allowed to switch from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network, is similar to the method in which the first mobile management network element determines, based on the first switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network in the embodiment shown in Figure 3. They can refer to each other and are not described in detail here.

步骤604:vAMF根据切换请求消息1生成切换请求消息2,向hMME发送切换请求消息2。Step 604: The vAMF generates a handover request message 2 according to the handover request message 1, and sends the handover request message 2 to the hMME.

示例性的,hAMF可以根据target eNB ID找到对应的hMME。Exemplarily, hAMF can find the corresponding hMME based on the target eNB ID.

可选的,hAMF可以向hSMF+PGW-C请求获取UE的PDU会话对应的UE EPS PDN connection信息,根据切换请求消息1中的信息及获取的UE EPS PDN connection信息生成切换请求消息2。Optionally, hAMF may request hSMF+PGW-C to obtain the UE EPS PDN connection information corresponding to the UE's PDU session, and generate a switching request message 2 based on the information in the switching request message 1 and the obtained UE EPS PDN connection information.

步骤605:hMME完成归属运营商网络切换准备。Step 605: hMME completes the home operator network handover preparation.

例如,hMME与归属运营商网络中的其他网元(如SGW,SMF+PGW-C,UPF+PGW-U,HPCF等)网元进行交互,完成归属运营商网络侧的PDN connection建立。For example, hMME interacts with other network elements in the home operator network (such as SGW, SMF+PGW-C, UPF+PGW-U, HPCF, etc.) to complete the establishment of PDN connection on the home operator network side.

步骤606:hMME向hAMF发送切换响应消息1。Step 606: hMME sends a handover response message 1 to hAMF.

其中,切换响应消息1用于响应hAMF发送的切换请求消息2。Among them, the switching response message 1 is used to respond to the switching request message 2 sent by the hAMF.

步骤607:hAMF接收到切换响应消息1后,生成切换命令(handover command),切换命令可以指示UE切换到目标eNB。hAMF将切换命令封装在N14容器中,向vAMF发送切换响应消息2。Step 607: After receiving the handover response message 1, hAMF generates a handover command, which can instruct the UE to handover to the target eNB. hAMF encapsulates the handover command in an N14 container and sends a handover response message 2 to vAMF.

其中,该切换响应消息2中包含N14容器。The switching response message 2 includes an N14 container.

可选的,hAMF根据接收到切换响应消息1,判断是否需要建立数据转发隧道,若是需要,则hAMF触发hSMF+PGW-C根据接收到的切换响应消息1中的数据转发隧道的信息与拜访运营商网络侧进行交 互建立数据转发隧道,并将拜访运营商网络的数据转发隧道的信息与切换响应消息1中的其他信息一起包含在生成的切换命令中。Optionally, hAMF determines whether a data forwarding tunnel needs to be established based on the received switching response message 1. If necessary, hAMF triggers hSMF+PGW-C to communicate with the visited operator network side based on the information of the data forwarding tunnel in the received switching response message 1. A data forwarding tunnel is established between the two networks, and the information of the data forwarding tunnel of the visited operator network is included in the generated handover command together with other information in the handover response message 1.

其中,当切换响应消息1中包含数据转发隧道的信息则表示需要建立数据转发隧道,否则不需要。If the switching response message 1 includes the information of the data forwarding tunnel, it means that the data forwarding tunnel needs to be established, otherwise it does not need to be established.

步骤608:vAMF解析切换响应消息2,将N14容器中的切换命令转发给共享RAN。Step 608: The vAMF parses the handover response message 2 and forwards the handover command in the N14 container to the shared RAN.

步骤609:共享RAN向UE发送切换命令。Step 609: The shared RAN sends a handover command to the UE.

可选的,若切换命令中包含间接数据转发路径的信息,则共享RAN将接收的下行数据通过间接数据转发路径转发的目标eNB。Optionally, if the handover command includes information of the indirect data forwarding path, the shared RAN forwards the received downlink data to the target eNB through the indirect data forwarding path.

步骤610:UE切换到归属运营商网络中的目标eNB后,向hMME发送切换完成通知消息。Step 610: After the UE switches to the target eNB in the home operator's network, it sends a switching completion notification message to the hMME.

其中,切换完成通知消息用于通知UE已切换到归属运营商网络中的4G网络。The switching completion notification message is used to notify the UE that it has switched to the 4G network in the home operator's network.

步骤611:hMME向hAMF发送切换完成通知消息。Step 611: hMME sends a handover completion notification message to hAMF.

步骤612:hAMF根据切换完成通知消息确认切换已经完成,需要释放拜访运营商网络侧的会话。hAMF通过hSMF+PGW-C释放vSMF侧的PDU会话。然后,hAMF向vAMF发送N14消息2,N14消息2中包含N14容器,N14容器中包含切换完成通知消息。Step 612: hAMF confirms that the handover has been completed according to the handover completion notification message and needs to release the session on the visited operator network side. hAMF releases the PDU session on the vSMF side through hSMF+PGW-C. Then, hAMF sends N14 message 2 to vAMF, and N14 message 2 contains N14 container, which contains the handover completion notification message.

步骤613:vAMF向hAMF发送N14消息3,N14消息3中包含N14容器,N14容器中包含切换完成确认消息1。Step 613: vAMF sends N14 message 3 to hAMF. N14 message 3 includes an N14 container, and the N14 container includes a switching completion confirmation message 1.

其中,切换完成确认消息1可以指示UE在拜访运营商网络的会话已释放完成。The handover completion confirmation message 1 may indicate that the session of the UE in the visited operator network has been released.

步骤614:hAMF根据收到的hSMF+PGW-C释放vSMF侧会话的结果信息及VAMF返回的切换完成确认消息1,生成切换完成确认消息2,并向hMME发送切换完成确认消息2。Step 614: hAMF generates a switching completion confirmation message 2 according to the result information of hSMF+PGW-C releasing the vSMF side session and the switching completion confirmation message 1 returned by VAMF, and sends the switching completion confirmation message 2 to hMME.

通过上述方法,实现了在共享5G网络与归属运营商4G网络之间不能直接通信的场景下,保证UE在从拜访运营商网络的5G网络到归属运营商网络的4G网络移动时保持业务的连续性。Through the above method, in the scenario where the shared 5G network and the home operator's 4G network cannot communicate directly, it is achieved to ensure that the UE maintains service continuity when moving from the 5G network of the visited operator's network to the 4G network of the home operator's network.

上面介绍了,保证终端设备从拜访运营商网络的第一制式网络到归属运营商网络的第二制式网络移动时保持业务的连续性的方法,如保证UE从拜访运营商网络的5G网络到归属运营商网络的4G网络移动时保持业务的连续性的方法。下面介绍保证UE从归属运营商网络的第二制式网络到拜访运营商网络的第一制式网络移动时保持业务的连续性的方法,如保证UE从归属运营商网络的4G网络到拜访运营商网络的5G网络移动时保持业务的连续性的方法。The above describes a method for ensuring that the service continuity is maintained when the terminal device moves from the first standard network of the visited operator network to the second standard network of the home operator network, such as a method for ensuring that the service continuity is maintained when the UE moves from the 5G network of the visited operator network to the 4G network of the home operator network. The following describes a method for ensuring that the service continuity is maintained when the UE moves from the second standard network of the home operator network to the first standard network of the visited operator network, such as a method for ensuring that the service continuity is maintained when the UE moves from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network.

图7示出了一种通信方法,该通信方法可以保证终端设备从归属运营商网络的第二制式网络到拜访运营商网络的第一制式网络移动时保持业务的连续性。示例性的,该方法的流程可以包括如下步骤:FIG7 shows a communication method, which can ensure that the terminal device maintains service continuity when it moves from the second standard network of the home operator network to the first standard network of the visited operator network. Exemplarily, the process of the method may include the following steps:

步骤701:第二移动管理网元从第三移动管理网元接收第一切换请求消息,第一切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络切换到第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络。Step 701: The second mobility management network element receives a first switching request message from a third mobility management network element, where the first switching request message is used to request switching of a terminal device from a second-standard network in a second operator network to a first-standard network in a first operator network.

其中,第二移动管理网元属于第二运营商网络中的第一制式网络;第三移动管理网元属于第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络。The second mobility management network element belongs to a first-standard network in the second operator network; and the third mobility management network element belongs to a second-standard network in the second operator network.

例如,第二移动管理网元可以为hAMF。For example, the second mobility management network element may be hAMF.

例如,第三移动管理网元可以是hMME。For example, the third mobility management network element may be hMME.

第一运营商网络可以为终端设备的拜访运营商网络,第二运营商网络可以为终端设备的归属运营商网络。The first operator network may be a visited operator network of the terminal device, and the second operator network may be a home operator network of the terminal device.

第一制式网络可以为5G网络,第二制式网络可以为4G网络。The first-standard network may be a 5G network, and the second-standard network may be a 4G network.

在一种实施方式中,第三移动管理网元从源接入网设备接收到请求将终端设备从第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络切换到第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络的消息后,向第二移动管理网元发送第一切换请求消息。In one embodiment, after the third mobility management network element receives a message from the source access network device requesting to switch the terminal device from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network, it sends a first switching request message to the second mobility management network element.

源接入网设备为终端设备当前的接入网设备,源接入网设备用于终端设备接入第二运营商的第一制式网络。The source access network device is the current access network device of the terminal device, and the source access network device is used for the terminal device to access the first-standard network of the second operator.

步骤702:第二移动管理网元根据第一切换请求消息,确定终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享接入网设备,目标接入网设备用于终端设备接入第一运营商网络。Step 702: The second mobility management network element determines, based on the first switching request message, that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device, and the target access network device is used for the terminal device to access the first operator's network.

在一种可选的实施方式中,第一切换请求消息包括目标接入网设备的标识(例如,target gNB ID)。In an optional embodiment, the first switching request message includes an identifier of the target access network device (e.g., target gNB ID).

进一步地,第二移动管理网元根据第一切换请求消息确定终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享接入网设备,方法可以为:第二移动管理网元根据目标接入网设备的标识,确定目标接入网设备所属的第一PLMN的标识,第一PLMN与第一运营商网络对应;若第一PLMN的标识与共享PLMN标识对应,则第二移动管理网元确定终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享接入网设备;其中,共享PLMN标识用于第 二运营商网络的用户接入第一运营商网络的共享接入网设备。Further, the second mobility management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device according to the first switching request message, and the method may be: the second mobility management network element determines the identifier of the first PLMN to which the target access network device belongs according to the identifier of the target access network device, and the first PLMN corresponds to the first operator network; if the identifier of the first PLMN corresponds to the shared PLMN identifier, the second mobility management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device; wherein the shared PLMN identifier is used for the first Users of the second operator network access the shared access network device of the first operator network.

示例性的,若第一PLMN的标识与共享PLMN标识对应,则第二移动管理网元确定终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享接入网设备,例如可以为:第二移动管理网元通过查询HSS/UDM或本地配置确认第一PLMN的标识所对应的第一运营商网络与第二运营商网络存在共享协议,即第二运营商网络的设备可以通过第一运营商网络分配的共享PLMN接入第一运营网络的共享设备,则第二移动管理网元确定终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享接入网设备。Exemplarily, if the identifier of the first PLMN corresponds to the shared PLMN identifier, the second mobile management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device. For example, it can be: the second mobile management network element confirms through querying HSS/UDM or local configuration that there is a sharing agreement between the first operator network corresponding to the identifier of the first PLMN and the second operator network, that is, the device of the second operator network can access the shared device of the first operator network through the shared PLMN allocated by the first operator network. Then the second mobile management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device.

其中,终端设备接入共享接入网设备时,使用共享PLMN标识,也即共享PLMN标识可以理解为终端设备接入共享接入网设备所用的PLMN的标识。也可以理解为,非本运营商网络中的设备(如第二运营商网络中的终端设备)接入本运营商网络中的设备(如第一运营商网络中的接入网设备)时所使用的PLMN标识。Among them, when the terminal device accesses the shared access network device, the shared PLMN identifier is used, that is, the shared PLMN identifier can be understood as the identifier of the PLMN used by the terminal device to access the shared access network device. It can also be understood as the PLMN identifier used when a device in a non-operator network (such as a terminal device in the second operator network) accesses a device in the operator network (such as an access network device in the first operator network).

步骤703:第二移动管理网元根据第一切换请求消息,向第一移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息。Step 703: The second mobility management network element sends a second handover request message to the first mobility management network element according to the first handover request message.

其中,第二切换请求消息可以用于请求将终端设备从第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络切换到第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络。The second switching request message may be used to request switching of the terminal device from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network.

其中,第一移动管理网元属于第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络。例如,第一移动管理网元可以为vAMF。The first mobility management network element belongs to a first-standard network in a first operator network. For example, the first mobility management network element may be a vAMF.

在一些实施例中,当第一切换请求消息包括第二切换原因值,且第二切换原因值用于指示终端设备从第二制式网络切换到第一制式网络时,第二移动管理网元向第一移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息。In some embodiments, when the first switching request message includes a second switching reason value, and the second switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the second-standard network to the first-standard network, the second mobility management network element sends a second switching request message to the first mobility management network element.

例如,第二切换原因值可以为系统间切换指示(inter system handover indication),系统间切换指示用于指示终端设备从4G网络切换到5G网络。For example, the second handover reason value may be an inter-system handover indication (inter system handover indication), and the inter-system handover indication is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from a 4G network to a 5G network.

在一种可选的实施方式中,除了目标接入网设备的标识和第二切换原因值外,第一切换请求消息还可以包括以下信息中的一项或多项:MME UE上下文(MME UE context)或源侧到目标侧透传容器(source to target transparent container)。其中,源侧到目标侧透传容器可以参见前述涉及的相关描述。In an optional implementation, in addition to the identifier of the target access network device and the second switching reason value, the first switching request message may also include one or more of the following information: MME UE context or source to target transparent container. The source to target transparent container can refer to the related description mentioned above.

可选的,MME UE context可以包含国际移动用户识别码(international mobile subscriber identity,IMSI)、移动设备标识(mobile equipment identity,ME ID)、UE安全上下文(UE security context)、UE网络能力(UE network capability)、聚合最大比特率(aggregated maximum bit rate,AMBR)、选择的核心网操作标识符(selected CN operator ID)、接入点名称(access point name,APN)限制(restriction)、控制信号的服务GW地址和TEID(Serving GW address and TEID for control signalling)、或者EPS bearer context(s)。Optionally, the MME UE context may contain international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI), mobile equipment identity (ME ID), UE security context (UE security context), UE network capability (UE network capability), aggregated maximum bit rate (AMBR), selected CN operator ID, access point name (APN) restriction, Serving GW address and TEID for control signalling, or EPS bearer context(s).

在第二移动管理网元向第一移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息之前,第二移动管理网元可以根据第一切换请求消息,生成第二切换请求消息。Before the second mobility management network element sends the second handover request message to the first mobility management network element, the second mobility management network element may generate a second handover request message according to the first handover request message.

其中,第二切换请求消息中可以包含共享PLMN标识以及第一切换请求消息中包含的信息。The second switching request message may include the shared PLMN identifier and the information included in the first switching request message.

示例性的,第二移动管理网元可以根据MME UE context,将EPS bearer context转化成5GS移动管理(mobility management,MM)context。同时第二移动管理网元可以根据EPS bearer context中的EPS PDN connection包括的SMF+PGW-C的S5或S8接口地址及FQDN向hNRF请求获取SMF+PGW-C的N11或N16接口处的地址或者全域域名(fully qualified domain name,FQDN),并将其包含在5GS MM context中。相应地,第二切换请求消息中包含5GS MM context不再包含EPS bearer context。Exemplarily, the second mobility management network element may convert the EPS bearer context into a 5GS mobility management (mobility management, MM) context according to the MME UE context. At the same time, the second mobility management network element may request the hNRF to obtain the address or fully qualified domain name (FQDN) at the N11 or N16 interface of the SMF+PGW-C according to the S5 or S8 interface address and FQDN of the SMF+PGW-C included in the EPS PDN connection in the EPS bearer context, and include it in the 5GS MM context. Accordingly, the 5GS MM context included in the second handover request message no longer includes the EPS bearer context.

一种示例中,第二切换请求消息中还可以包括第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示第一移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息转发给第二移动管理网元。In an example, the second handover request message may further include second indication information, where the second indication information is used to instruct the first mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the second mobility management network element.

在一种可选的实施方式中,第二移动管理网元可以通过如下方法选择第一移动管理功能网元,进而向第一移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息:In an optional implementation manner, the second mobility management network element may select the first mobility management function network element by the following method, and then send the second handover request message to the first mobility management network element:

方法b1、第二移动管理网元根据本地配置的与目标接入网设备对应的第一移动管理网元。Method b1: The second mobility management network element is based on the locally configured first mobility management network element corresponding to the target access network device.

在该方法b1中,第二移动管理网元中配置有支持共享接入网设备的移动管理网元的列表,第二移动管理网元可以选择归属于第二运营商网络中的与目标接入网设备对应的第一移动管理网元。In the method b1, the second mobility management network element is configured with a list of mobility management network elements supporting shared access network devices, and the second mobility management network element can select a first mobility management network element corresponding to the target access network device and belonging to the second operator network.

方法b2、第二移动管理网元向网络存储网元查询第一移动管理网元的标识。Method b2: The second mobility management network element queries the network storage network element for the identifier of the first mobility management network element.

在该方法b2中,第一移动管理网元向网络存储网元注册了自身支持共享接入网设备的能力信息,以及第一移动管理网元支持的共享接入网设备的信息。例如,第一移动管理网元支持的共享接入网设备的信息可以包括共享接入网设备的对应的共享PLMN标识,以及共享PLMN标识对应的共享接入网设备的标识;或者,包括共享接入网设备的标识列表,以及共享接入网设备的标识列表所对应的共享PLMN 标识。In method b2, the first mobile management network element registers its own capability information of supporting shared access network devices and information of shared access network devices supported by the first mobile management network element with the network storage network element. For example, the information of shared access network devices supported by the first mobile management network element may include the corresponding shared PLMN identifier of the shared access network device and the identifier of the shared access network device corresponding to the shared PLMN identifier; or, may include a list of identifiers of the shared access network device and the shared PLMN corresponding to the list of identifiers of the shared access network device. Logo.

基于此,第二移动管理网元可以基于目标接入网设备的标识向网络存储网元查询支持该目标接入网设备的第一移动管理网元。Based on this, the second mobility management network element may query the network storage network element for the first mobility management network element that supports the target access network device based on the identifier of the target access network device.

步骤704:第一移动管理网元根据第二切换请求消息,确定允许终端设备从第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络切换到第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络。Step 704: The first mobility management network element determines, based on the second switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second-standard network in the second operator's network to the first-standard network in the first operator's network.

由于第二切换请求消息包括共享PLMN标识,因此第一移动管理网元根据第二切换请求消息,确定允许终端设备从第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络切换到第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络,方法可以为:当终端设备当前使用的第二PLMN的标识与共享PLMN标识存在等效映射关系,则第一移动管理网元确定允许终端设备从第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络切换到第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络。Since the second switching request message includes a shared PLMN identifier, the first mobile management network element determines, based on the second switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network. The method may be: when there is an equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the second PLMN currently used by the terminal device and the shared PLMN identifier, the first mobile management network element determines that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network.

第二PLMN可以是第二运营商网络的签约用户接入第二运营商网络所使用的PLMN。The second PLMN may be a PLMN used by subscribers of the second operator network to access the second operator network.

可选的,第一移动管理网元中配置了共享PLMN标识与第二PLMN的标识的等效对应关系。Optionally, an equivalent correspondence between the shared PLMN identifier and the identifier of the second PLMN is configured in the first mobility management network element.

步骤705:第一移动管理网元根据第二切换请求消息,向第一会话管理网元发送会话建立请求消息。Step 705: The first mobility management network element sends a session establishment request message to the first session management network element according to the second handover request message.

其中,第一会话管理网元属于第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络。例如,第一会话管理网元可以为vSMF。The first session management network element belongs to a first-standard network in a first operator network. For example, the first session management network element may be a vSMF.

可选的,会话建立请求消息中可以包括5GS MM context等。Optionally, the session establishment request message may include 5GS MM context, etc.

第一会话管理网元接收到会话建立请求消息后,可以基于5GS MM context,与第一运营商网络中的用户面网元和策略控制网元等网元进行交互,完成第一运营商网络侧PDN会话建立,及第一会话管理网元与hSMF+PGW-C、hUPF等进行交互完成第二运营商网络侧会话建立。之后,第一会话管理网元向第一移动管理网元发送会话建立响应消息,会话建立响应消息用于响应会话建立请求消息。After receiving the session establishment request message, the first session management network element can interact with the user plane network element and policy control network element in the first operator network based on the 5GS MM context to complete the establishment of the PDN session on the first operator network side, and the first session management network element interacts with hSMF+PGW-C, hUPF, etc. to complete the establishment of the session on the second operator network side. Afterwards, the first session management network element sends a session establishment response message to the first mobility management network element, and the session establishment response message is used to respond to the session establishment request message.

第一移动管理网元接收会话建立响应消息后,向第二移动管理网元发送第一切换响应消息,第一切换响应消息用于响应第二切换请求消息。After receiving the session establishment response message, the first mobility management network element sends a first handover response message to the second mobility management network element, where the first handover response message is used to respond to the second handover request message.

示例性的,第一移动管理网元接收会话建立响应消息后,确认第一会话管理网元已经建立的PDU会话的信息及对应的EPS bearer setup list,第一移动管理网元生成第一切换响应消息。第一切换响应消息中可以包括原因(cause)、目标侧到源侧透明容器(target to source transparent container)、EPS bearer setup List、target AMF ID。其中,原因和目标侧到源侧透明容器的介绍可以参见前述相关描述。Exemplarily, after receiving the session establishment response message, the first mobility management network element confirms the information of the PDU session established by the first session management network element and the corresponding EPS bearer setup list, and the first mobility management network element generates a first switching response message. The first switching response message may include a cause, a target to source transparent container, an EPS bearer setup List, and a target AMF ID. For the introduction of the cause and the target to source transparent container, please refer to the above-mentioned related description.

进一步地,第二移动管理网元可以记录target AMF ID,当接收到来自该target AMF ID所对应的AMF发送的切换完成消息后,向第三移动管理网元发送第二切换响应消息。Furthermore, the second mobile management network element may record the target AMF ID, and upon receiving a switching completion message sent by the AMF corresponding to the target AMF ID, send a second switching response message to the third mobile management network element.

可选的,当第二切换响应消息中包含间接数据转发路径的信息时,第三移动管理网元可以请求SGW建立下行数据转发路径。Optionally, when the second switching response message includes information about the indirect data forwarding path, the third mobility management network element may request the SGW to establish a downlink data forwarding path.

进一步可选地,第三移动管理网元通过源接入网设备向终端设备发送切换命令,以触发终端设备向目标接入网设备发起切换,以使终端设备重配到目标接入网设备。Further optionally, the third mobility management network element sends a switching command to the terminal device through the source access network device to trigger the terminal device to initiate a switching to the target access network device, so that the terminal device is reconfigured to the target access network device.

当终端设备切换到目标接入网设备之后,终端设备通过共享接入网设备(即目标接入网设备)向第一移动管理网元发送切换完成通知消息,切换完成通知消息用于通知所述终端设备已切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络;所述第一移动管理网元根据第二切换请求消息中包括的第二指示信息,向第二移动管理网元发送该切换完成通知消息。After the terminal device switches to the target access network device, the terminal device sends a switching completion notification message to the first mobile management network element through the shared access network device (i.e., the target access network device), and the switching completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that it has switched to the first-standard network in the first operator network; the first mobile management network element sends the switching completion notification message to the second mobile management network element according to the second indication information included in the second switching request message.

可选的,切换完成通知消息中可以包括第一移动管理网元的标识。第二移动管理网元可以通过对比第一移动管理网元的标识与存储的target AMF ID,若相同,则向第三移动管理网元发送重定向切换完成通知消息。重定向切换完成通知消息中可以包含重定向完成通知指示(relocation complete notification indication),该指示可以用于指示终端设备成功切换。Optionally, the handover completion notification message may include the identifier of the first mobility management network element. The second mobility management network element may compare the identifier of the first mobility management network element with the stored target AMF ID, and if they are the same, send a redirection handover completion notification message to the third mobility management network element. The redirection handover completion notification message may include a redirection complete notification indication (relocation complete notification indication), which can be used to indicate that the terminal device has successfully switched.

第三移动管理网元接收到重定向通知完成消息后,释放EPS相关的承载。之后第三移动管理网元向第二移动管理网元发送重定向完成确认消息(relocation complete ack)。After receiving the redirection notification completion message, the third mobility management network element releases the EPS-related bearers. Then, the third mobility management network element sends a redirection completion confirmation message (relocation complete ack) to the second mobility management network element.

之后,第二移动管理网元向第一移动管理网元转发切换完成确认消息。Afterwards, the second mobility management network element forwards the switching completion confirmation message to the first mobility management network element.

通过上述通信方法,可以将终端设备从归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络间的不同制式间的切换请求转换成两步:归属运营商网络内不同制式间的切换和归属运营商网络与拜访运营商网络间同一制式间的切换,可以保证终端设备从归属运营商网络的第二制式网络到拜访运营商网络的第一制式网络移动时保持业务的连续性。Through the above communication method, the switching request between different standards of the terminal device between the home operator network and the visited operator network can be converted into two steps: switching between different standards within the home operator network and switching between the same standard between the home operator network and the visited operator network. This can ensure that the terminal device maintains service continuity when moving from the second standard network of the home operator network to the first standard network of the visited operator network.

基于图7所示的实施例,图8示出了一种通信方法的示例。在该示例中以第一运营商网络为终端设 备的拜访运营商网络,第二运营商网络为终端设备的归属运营商网络,第一制式网络为5G网络,第二制式网络为4G网络,共享接入网设备为共享RAN,源接入网设备为eNB,第一移动管理网元为vAMF,第二移动管理网元为hAMF,第三移动管理网元为hMME为例说明。在该示例中,UE从归属运营商的4G网络切换到拜访运营商的5G共享RAN时,hMME根据检测到的目标gNB ID的PLMN ID将切换请求消息转发到默认配置的hAMF上。hAMF再选择合适的vAMF,并将消息转发到对应的vAMF,由vAMF根据接收到的信息及本身的能力判断是否允许UE切换到共享RAN。然后再由hAMF辅助hMME与vAMF进行交互完成在归属运营商的4G网络与拜访运营商的5G网络的切换及保障切换过程中的业务连续性。示例性的,该示例的流程可以包括如下步骤:Based on the embodiment shown in FIG7 , FIG8 shows an example of a communication method. The first standard network is a 5G network, the second standard network is a 4G network, the shared access network device is a shared RAN, the source access network device is an eNB, the first mobile management network element is a vAMF, the second mobile management network element is a hAMF, and the third mobile management network element is a hMME. In this example, when the UE switches from the 4G network of the home operator to the 5G shared RAN of the visited operator, the hMME forwards the switching request message to the default configured hAMF according to the PLMN ID of the detected target gNB ID. The hAMF then selects a suitable vAMF and forwards the message to the corresponding vAMF, which determines whether to allow the UE to switch to the shared RAN based on the received information and its own capabilities. Then, the hAMF assists the hMME in interacting with the vAMF to complete the switching between the 4G network of the home operator and the 5G network of the visited operator and to ensure business continuity during the switching process. Exemplarily, the process of this example may include the following steps:

步骤801:eNB向hMME发送切换请求消息1。Step 801: the eNB sends a handover request message 1 to the hMME.

其中,切换请求消息1用于请求将UE从归属运营商网络的4G网络切换到拜访运营商网络的5G网络。Among them, the switching request message 1 is used to request to switch the UE from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network.

切换请求消息1中包含target gNB ID,第二切换原因值,MME UE context和source to target transparent container。The handover request message 1 contains the target gNB ID, the second handover reason value, MME UE context and source to target transparent container.

其中,切换请求消息1中各参数的含义可以参见前述图7所述的实施例中涉及的相关描述,此处不再赘述。Among them, the meaning of each parameter in the switching request message 1 can be found in the relevant description involved in the embodiment described in Figure 7 above, and will not be repeated here.

步骤802:hMME向hAMF发送切换请求消息1。Step 802: hMME sends a handover request message 1 to hAMF.

其中,切换请求消息1对应图7所述的实施例中的第一切换请求消息。The handover request message 1 corresponds to the first handover request message in the embodiment described in FIG. 7 .

示例性的,在hMME上配置一个默认的hAMF,当hMME接收到eNB的切换请求消息1后,hMME根据第二切换原因值确认UE从4G网络切换到5G网络,且target gNB ID对应的PLMN ID不属于归属运营商网络对应的PLMN ID,直接将该切换请求消息1转发到默认配置的hAMF上。Exemplarily, a default hAMF is configured on the hMME. When the hMME receives the switching request message 1 from the eNB, the hMME confirms that the UE switches from the 4G network to the 5G network according to the second switching reason value, and the PLMN ID corresponding to the target gNB ID does not belong to the PLMN ID corresponding to the home operator network, and directly forwards the switching request message 1 to the default configured hAMF.

步骤803:hAMF根据切换请求消息1,确定UE的目标接入网设备为共享RAN,目标接入网设备用于终端设备接入第一运营商网络。Step 803: hAMF determines, based on the handover request message 1, that the target access network device of the UE is a shared RAN, and the target access network device is used for the terminal device to access the first operator's network.

示例性的,hAMF根据切换请求消息1中target gNB ID,确定target gNB ID对应的第一PLMN的标识,hAMF同时向hUDM查询该UE的签约信息,根据从hUDM获取到的签约信息判断,该UE使用的对应的共享PLMN ID,若第一PLMN的标识与共享PLMN ID对应,则hAMF确定终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享RAN。Exemplarily, hAMF determines the identifier of the first PLMN corresponding to the target gNB ID based on the target gNB ID in the switching request message 1. hAMF simultaneously queries hUDM for the subscription information of the UE, and determines, based on the subscription information obtained from hUDM, the corresponding shared PLMN ID used by the UE. If the identifier of the first PLMN corresponds to the shared PLMN ID, hAMF determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is the shared RAN.

步骤804:hAMF根据切换请求消息1向vAMF发送切换请求消息2。Step 804: hAMF sends a switching request message 2 to vAMF according to the switching request message 1.

其中,切换请求消息1对应图7所述的实施例中的第二切换请求消息,具体可以参见第二切换请求消息的描述,此处不再详述。Among them, the switching request message 1 corresponds to the second switching request message in the embodiment described in FIG. 7 . For details, please refer to the description of the second switching request message, which will not be described in detail here.

步骤805:vAMF根据切换请求消息2,确定允许UE从归属运营商网络中的4G网络切换到拜访运营商网络中的5G网络。Step 805: The vAMF determines, based on the handover request message 2, that the UE is allowed to switch from the 4G network in the home operator network to the 5G network in the visited operator network.

其中,vAMF根据切换请求消息2,确定允许UE从归属运营商网络中的4G网络切换到拜访运营商网络中的5G网络的方法可以参见图7所示的实施例中涉及的相关方法,此处不再详细描述。Among them, the method for vAMF to determine, based on the switching request message 2, that the UE is allowed to switch from the 4G network in the home operator network to the 5G network in the visited operator network can be referred to the relevant method involved in the embodiment shown in Figure 7, which is not described in detail here.

可选的,当vAMF发现目标gNB ID不在自己的服务范围内,可以基于目标gNB ID和共享PLMN ID向NRF查询一个支持目标gNB ID以及共享PLMN ID的vAMF,并将切换请求消息2转发给查询到的vAMF中。Optionally, when vAMF finds that the target gNB ID is not within its service range, it can query NRF for a vAMF that supports the target gNB ID and shared PLMN ID based on the target gNB ID and shared PLMN ID, and forward the switching request message 2 to the queried vAMF.

vAMF中配置共享PLMN ID与归属运营商网络的PLMN ID的对应关系。The correspondence between the shared PLMN ID and the PLMN ID of the home operator network is configured in vAMF.

步骤806:vAMF根据切换请求消息2,向vSMF发送会话建立请求消息。Step 806: vAMF sends a session establishment request message to vSMF according to the switching request message 2.

可选的,vAMF可以选择一个vSMF,例如,可以是选择vSMF上预配置的用于处理UE会话的默认vSMF,或是根据5GS MM context中携带的切片信息等信息选择一个合适的vSMF,或是根据5GS MM context中携带的h hSMF+PGW-C N11或N16接口地址或FQDN信息请求NRF选择一个可以与hSMF+PGW-C交互的vSMF。Optionally, vAMF may select a vSMF, for example, it may select a default vSMF preconfigured on the vSMF for handling UE sessions, or select a suitable vSMF based on information such as the slice information carried in the 5GS MM context, or request NRF to select a vSMF that can interact with hSMF+PGW-C based on the hSMF+PGW-C N11 or N16 interface address or FQDN information carried in the 5GS MM context.

会话建立请求消息中可以携带5GS MM context。The session establishment request message can carry 5GS MM context.

步骤807:vSMF完成拜访运营商网络切换准备。Step 807: vSMF completes the preparation for switching to the visited operator network.

示例性的,vSMF根据携带5GS MM context,vSMF与vUPF、vPCF等拜访运营商网络侧的网元进行交互,完成拜访运营商网络侧PDN会话建立,及vSMF与hSMF+PGW-C、hUPF等进行交互完成归属运营商侧会话建立。Illustratively, based on carrying 5GS MM context, vSMF interacts with network elements on the visited operator network side, such as vUPF and vPCF, to complete the establishment of the PDN session on the visited operator network side, and vSMF interacts with hSMF+PGW-C, hUPF, etc. to complete the establishment of the session on the home operator side.

步骤808:vSMF向vAMF发送会话建立响应消息。 Step 808: vSMF sends a session establishment response message to vAMF.

步骤809:vAMF向hAMF发送切换响应消息1。Step 809: vAMF sends a handover response message 1 to hAMF.

其中,切换响应消息1用于响应切换请求消息2。The switching response message 1 is used to respond to the switching request message 2 .

示例性的,vAMF接收会话建立响应消息后,确认vSMF已经建立的PDU会话的信息及对应的EPS bearer setup list,vAMF生成切换响应消息1。切换响应消息1中可以包括原因(cause)、目标侧到源侧透明容器(target to source transparent container)、EPS bearer setup List、target AMF ID。Exemplarily, after receiving the session establishment response message, vAMF confirms the information of the PDU session established by vSMF and the corresponding EPS bearer setup list, and vAMF generates a switching response message 1. The switching response message 1 may include a cause, a target to source transparent container, an EPS bearer setup List, and a target AMF ID.

步骤810:hAMF记录target AMF ID,当接收到来自该target AMF ID所对应的AMF发送的切换完成消息后,向hMME发送切换响应消息2。Step 810: hAMF records the target AMF ID, and upon receiving the switching completion message sent by the AMF corresponding to the target AMF ID, it sends a switching response message 2 to hMME.

可选的,hAMF将该AMF发送的切换完成消息也转发给hMME。Optionally, hAMF also forwards the handover completion message sent by the AMF to hMME.

步骤811:hMME向eNB发送切换命令,以触发UE切换到目标接入网设备。Step 811: hMME sends a handover command to the eNB to trigger the UE to handover to the target access network device.

可选的,当切换响应消息2中包含间接数据转发路径的信息时,hMME可以请求SGW建立下行数据转发路径。Optionally, when the handover response message 2 includes information about the indirect data forwarding path, the hMME may request the SGW to establish a downlink data forwarding path.

步骤812:eNB向UE发送切换命令,UE向共享RAN发起切换流程。Step 812: the eNB sends a handover command to the UE, and the UE initiates a handover process to the shared RAN.

步骤813:当UE切换到目标接入网设备之后,UE通过共享RAN(即目标接入网设备)向vAMF发送切换完成通知消息,切换完成通知消息用于通知UE已切换到拜访运营商网络中的5G网络。Step 813: After the UE switches to the target access network device, the UE sends a switching completion notification message to the vAMF through the shared RAN (i.e., the target access network device). The switching completion notification message is used to notify the UE that it has switched to the 5G network in the visited operator network.

步骤814:vAMF根据切换请求消息2中包括的第二指示信息,向hAMF发送该切换完成通知消息。Step 814: vAMF sends the switching completion notification message to hAMF according to the second indication information included in the switching request message 2.

可选的,切换完成通知消息中可以包括vAMF ID。Optionally, the vAMF ID may be included in the switch completion notification message.

步骤815:hAMF接收到vAMF发送的切换完成通知消息后,通过对比vAMF ID与存储的target AMF ID,若相同,向hMME发送切换完成通知消息。Step 815: After hAMF receives the switching completion notification message sent by vAMF, it compares the vAMF ID with the stored target AMF ID. If they are the same, it sends a switching completion notification message to hMME.

步骤816:hMME收到hAMF发送的切换完成通知消息后,释放EPS相关的承载。之后,hMME向hAMF发送切换完成确认消息。Step 816: After receiving the handover completion notification message sent by hAMF, hMME releases EPS-related bearers. Then, hMME sends a handover completion confirmation message to hAMF.

步骤817:hAMF向vAMF转发切换完成确认消息。Step 817: hAMF forwards the switching completion confirmation message to vAMF.

基于上述方法,可以保证UE从归属运营商网络的4G网络到拜访运营商网络的5G网络移动时保持业务的连续性的方法。Based on the above method, it is possible to ensure that service continuity is maintained when the UE moves from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network.

除上述图7和图8所示的通信方法外,本申请实施例还提供了图9和图10所示的通信方法,可以保证UE在从归属运营商网络的4G网络到拜访运营商网络的5G网络移动时保持业务的连续性。In addition to the communication method shown in Figures 7 and 8 above, the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method shown in Figures 9 and 10, which can ensure that the UE maintains service continuity when moving from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network.

图9所示的示例中,UE从归属运营商网络的4G网络切换到拜访运营商网络的5G网络时,由hAMF辅助将hMME接收到的切换请求转发到vAMF,vAMF确定允许该UE向拜访运营商网络的5G网络发起切换,并将切换准备完成的消息及确认消息通过hAMF转发到hMME,完成UE从归属运营商网络的4G网络到拜访运营商网络的5G的切换。示例性的,该示例的流程可以包括如下步骤:In the example shown in Figure 9, when the UE switches from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network, the hAMF assists in forwarding the handover request received by the hMME to the vAMF, and the vAMF determines that the UE is allowed to initiate a handover to the 5G network of the visited operator network, and forwards the handover preparation completion message and confirmation message to the hMME through the hAMF, completing the handover of the UE from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network. Exemplarily, the process of this example may include the following steps:

步骤901:eNB向hMME发送切换请求消息1。Step 901: the eNB sends a handover request message 1 to the hMME.

其中,切换请求消息1用于请求将UE从归属运营商网络的4G网络切换到拜访运营商网络的5G网络。Among them, the switching request message 1 is used to request to switch the UE from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network.

切换请求消息1中包含target gNB ID,第二切换原因值,MME UE context和source to target transparent container。The handover request message 1 contains the target gNB ID, the second handover reason value, MME UE context and source to target transparent container.

其中,切换请求消息1中各参数的含义可以参见前述图7所述的实施例中涉及的相关描述,此处不再赘述。Among them, the meaning of each parameter in the switching request message 1 can be found in the relevant description involved in the embodiment described in Figure 7 above, and will not be repeated here.

步骤902:hMME向hAMF发送切换请求消息1。Step 902: hMME sends a handover request message 1 to hAMF.

示例性的,在hMME上配置一个默认的hAMF,当hMME接收到eNB的切换请求消息1后,hMME根据第二切换原因值确认UE从4G网络切换到5G网络,且target gNB ID对应的PLMN ID不属于归属运营商网络对应的PLMN ID,直接将该切换请求消息1转发到默认配置的hAMF上。Exemplarily, a default hAMF is configured on the hMME. When the hMME receives the switching request message 1 from the eNB, the hMME confirms that the UE switches from the 4G network to the 5G network according to the second switching reason value, and the PLMN ID corresponding to the target gNB ID does not belong to the PLMN ID corresponding to the home operator network, and directly forwards the switching request message 1 to the default configured hAMF.

步骤903:hAMF将切换请求消息1封装到N14容器中,向vAMF发送重定向切换请求消息(如N14消息),重定向切换请求消息中包含该N14容器。Step 903: hAMF encapsulates the switching request message 1 into the N14 container, and sends a redirected switching request message (such as an N14 message) to the vAMF. The redirected switching request message includes the N14 container.

示例性的,hAMF根据切换请求消息1中的第二切换原因值确定UE从4G切换到5G,判断需要将该切换请求消息1转发给vAMF。其中,vAMF是target gNB ID对应的PLMN ID所对应的AMF。Exemplarily, hAMF determines that the UE switches from 4G to 5G according to the second switching reason value in the switching request message 1, and determines that the switching request message 1 needs to be forwarded to vAMF. Among them, vAMF is the AMF corresponding to the PLMN ID corresponding to the target gNB ID.

可选的,hAMF上配置有拜访运营商网络的PLMN ID与vAMF的对应关系。Optionally, hAMF is configured with the correspondence between the PLMN ID of the visited operator network and vAMF.

重定向切换请求消息中包括一个转发指示(forward_indication),该转发指示用于指示vAMF在接收到切换完成通知消息后,转发给hAMF。The redirection switching request message includes a forward indication (forward_indication), which is used to instruct the vAMF to forward the switching completion notification message to the hAMF after receiving it.

步骤904:vAMF解析重定向切换请求消息得到N14容器中封装的切换请求消息1,并根据切换请 求消息1,确定允许UE从归属运营商网络中的4G网络切换到拜访运营商网络中的5G网络。Step 904: vAMF parses the redirected switching request message to obtain the switching request message 1 encapsulated in the N14 container, and Request message 1 to determine whether the UE is allowed to switch from the 4G network in the home operator network to the 5G network in the visited operator network.

示例性的,vAMF根据切换请求消息1中target gNB ID,确定target gNB ID对应的第一PLMN的标识,vAMF同时向hUDM查询该UE的签约信息,根据从hUDM获取到的签约信息判断,该UE使用的对应的共享PLMN ID,若第一PLMN的标识与共享PLMN ID对应,则vAMF确定终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享RAN。可选的,vAMF通过查询本地配置确认自身支持UE从归属运营商的4G网络切换到拜访运营商的5G网络。Exemplarily, vAMF determines the identifier of the first PLMN corresponding to the target gNB ID according to the target gNB ID in the handover request message 1. vAMF also queries the subscription information of the UE from hUDM, and determines the corresponding shared PLMN ID used by the UE according to the subscription information obtained from hUDM. If the identifier of the first PLMN corresponds to the shared PLMN ID, vAMF determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is the shared RAN. Optionally, vAMF confirms that it supports the UE to switch from the 4G network of the home operator to the 5G network of the visited operator by querying the local configuration.

可选的,vAMF中配置了共享PLMN ID与归属运营商网络的PLMN ID的对应关系。vAMF通过共享PLMN ID与归属运营商网络的PLMN ID的对应关系,确定共享PLMN与归属运营商网络的PLMN为等效PLMN,由此确定允许UE从归属运营商网络中的4G网络切换到拜访运营商网络中的5G网络。Optionally, the vAMF is configured with the correspondence between the shared PLMN ID and the PLMN ID of the home operator network. The vAMF determines that the shared PLMN and the PLMN of the home operator network are equivalent PLMNs through the correspondence between the shared PLMN ID and the PLMN ID of the home operator network, thereby determining that the UE is allowed to switch from the 4G network in the home operator network to the 5G network in the visited operator network.

vAMF根据解析到切换请求消息1中的MME UE context,向hAMF(proxy)发送5GS context的请求,该请求中携带MME UE context。hAMF(proxy)根据MME UE context,将EPS context转化成5GS MM context。其中,hAMF可以根据EPS context中的EPS PDN connection包括的SMF+PGW-C的S5或S8接口地址及FQDN向hNRF请求获取SMF+PGW-C的N11或N16接口处的地址或者FQDN,并将其包含在5GS MM context中。According to the MME UE context parsed in the handover request message 1, vAMF sends a request for 5GS context to hAMF (proxy), which carries the MME UE context. hAMF (proxy) converts EPS context into 5GS MM context according to the MME UE context. Among them, hAMF can request hNRF to obtain the address or FQDN of the N11 or N16 interface of SMF+PGW-C according to the S5 or S8 interface address and FQDN of SMF+PGW-C included in the EPS PDN connection in the EPS context, and include it in the 5GS MM context.

步骤905:vAMF向vSMF发送会话建立请求消息。Step 905: vAMF sends a session establishment request message to vSMF.

可选的,vAMF可以选择一个vSMF,例如,可以是选择vSMF上预配置的用于处理UE会话的默认vSMF,或是根据5GS MM context中携带的切片信息等信息选择一个合适的vSMF,或是根据5GS MM context中携带的h hSMF+PGW-C N11或N16接口地址或FQDN信息请求NRF选择一个可以与hSMF+PGW-C交互的vSMF。Optionally, vAMF may select a vSMF, for example, it may select a default vSMF preconfigured on the vSMF for handling UE sessions, or select a suitable vSMF based on information such as the slice information carried in the 5GS MM context, or request NRF to select a vSMF that can interact with hSMF+PGW-C based on the hSMF+PGW-C N11 or N16 interface address or FQDN information carried in the 5GS MM context.

会话建立请求消息中可以携带5GS MM context。The session establishment request message can carry 5GS MM context.

步骤906:vSMF完成拜访运营商网络切换准备。Step 906: vSMF completes the preparation for switching to the visited operator network.

示例性的,vSMF根据携带5GS MM context,vSMF与vUPF、vPCF等拜访运营商网络侧的网元进行交互,完成拜访运营商网络侧PDN会话建立,及vSMF与hSMF+PGW-C、hUPF等进行交互完成归属运营商侧会话建立。Illustratively, based on carrying 5GS MM context, vSMF interacts with network elements on the visited operator network side, such as vUPF and vPCF, to complete the establishment of the PDN session on the visited operator network side, and vSMF interacts with hSMF+PGW-C, hUPF, etc. to complete the establishment of the session on the home operator side.

步骤907:vSMF向vAMF发送会话建立响应消息。Step 907: vSMF sends a session establishment response message to vAMF.

步骤908:vAMF生成切换响应消息1,并将切换响应消息1封装在N14容器中,向hAMF发送N14消息1,N14消息1中包括个该N14容器。Step 908: vAMF generates a switching response message 1, encapsulates the switching response message 1 in an N14 container, and sends the N14 message 1 to the hAMF, where the N14 message 1 includes the N14 container.

其中,切换响应消息1用于响应切换请求消息1。The switching response message 1 is used to respond to the switching request message 1 .

示例性的,vAMF接收会话建立响应消息后,确认vSMF已经建立的PDU会话的信息及对应的EPS bearer setup list,vAMF生成切换响应消息1。切换响应消息1中可以包括原因(cause)、目标侧到源侧透明容器(target to source transparent container)、EPS bearer setup List、target AMF ID。Exemplarily, after receiving the session establishment response message, vAMF confirms the information of the PDU session established by vSMF and the corresponding EPS bearer setup list, and vAMF generates a switching response message 1. The switching response message 1 may include a cause, a target to source transparent container, an EPS bearer setup List, and a target AMF ID.

步骤909:hAMF解析N14消息1,记录切换响应消息1中的target AMF ID,并将切换响应消息1转发给hMME。Step 909: hAMF parses N14 message 1, records the target AMF ID in the switching response message 1, and forwards the switching response message 1 to hMME.

步骤910:hMME向eNB发送切换命令,以触发UE切换到目标接入网设备。Step 910: hMME sends a handover command to the eNB to trigger the UE to handover to the target access network device.

步骤911:eNB向UE发送切换命令,UE向共享RAN发起切换流程。Step 911: the eNB sends a handover command to the UE, and the UE initiates a handover process to the shared RAN.

步骤912:当UE切换到目标接入网设备之后,UE通过共享RAN(即目标接入网设备)向vAMF发送切换完成通知消息。Step 912: After the UE switches to the target access network device, the UE sends a switching completion notification message to the vAMF through the shared RAN (ie, the target access network device).

其中,切换完成通知消息用于通知UE已切换到拜访运营商网络中的5G网络。Among them, the switching completion notification message is used to notify the UE that it has switched to the 5G network in the visited operator's network.

步骤913:vAMF根据重定向切换请求消息中包括的转发指示,将切换完成通知消息封装在N14容器中,向hAMF发送N14消息2。Step 913: vAMF encapsulates the switching completion notification message in an N14 container according to the forwarding indication included in the redirected switching request message, and sends N14 message 2 to hAMF.

其中,N14消息2中包含该N14容器。The N14 message 2 includes the N14 container.

步骤914:hAMF解析N14消息2得到切换完成通知消息后,通过对比vAMF ID与存储的target AMF ID,若相同,向hMME发送切换完成通知消息。Step 914: After hAMF parses N14 message 2 to obtain the switching completion notification message, it compares the vAMF ID with the stored target AMF ID. If they are the same, it sends a switching completion notification message to hMME.

步骤915:hMME收到hAMF发送的切换完成通知消息后,释放EPS相关的承载。之后,hMME向hAMF发送切换完成确认消息。Step 915: After receiving the handover completion notification message sent by hAMF, hMME releases EPS-related bearers. Then, hMME sends a handover completion confirmation message to hAMF.

步骤916:hAMF将hMME发送的切换完成确认消息封装在N14容器中,向vAMF发送N14消息3,N14消息3中包括该N14容器。Step 916: hAMF encapsulates the handover completion confirmation message sent by hMME in an N14 container, and sends N14 message 3 to vAMF, where N14 message 3 includes the N14 container.

基于上述方法,可以保证UE从归属运营商网络的4G网络到拜访运营商网络的5G网络移动时保 持业务的连续性的方法。Based on the above method, it can be ensured that the UE is kept stable when moving from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network. ways to maintain business continuity.

图10所示的示例中,当UE从归属运营商网络的4G网络到拜访运营商网络的5G网络时,其移动性管理的上下文保存在hAMF。该示例是通过vAMF作为proxy,传递共享RAN与hAMF之间的消息。hAMF在接收到hMME发送的切换请求消息后,根据消息指示vAMF选择vSMF,并将hAMF生成的PDU会话创建消息转发到选择的vSMF中,由hAMF通过vAMF与vSMF建立连接,实现拜访运营商网络侧PDU会话的建立。示例性的,该示例的流程可以包括如下步骤:In the example shown in Figure 10, when the UE moves from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network, the context of its mobility management is saved in hAMF. This example uses vAMF as a proxy to pass messages between the shared RAN and hAMF. After receiving the switching request message sent by hMME, hAMF selects vSMF according to the message instruction, and forwards the PDU session creation message generated by hAMF to the selected vSMF. hAMF establishes a connection with vSMF through vAMF to establish a PDU session on the visited operator network side. Exemplarily, the process of this example may include the following steps:

步骤1001:eNB向hMME发送切换请求消息1。Step 1001: the eNB sends a handover request message 1 to the hMME.

其中,切换请求消息1用于请求将UE从归属运营商网络的4G网络切换到拜访运营商网络的5G网络。Among them, the switching request message 1 is used to request to switch the UE from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network.

切换请求消息1中包含target gNB ID,第二切换原因值,MME UE context和source to target transparent container。The handover request message 1 contains the target gNB ID, the second handover reason value, MME UE context and source to target transparent container.

其中,切换请求消息1中各参数的含义可以参见前述图7所述的实施例中涉及的相关描述,此处不再赘述。Among them, the meaning of each parameter in the switching request message 1 can be found in the relevant description involved in the embodiment described in Figure 7 above, and will not be repeated here.

步骤1002:hMME向hAMF发送切换请求消息1。Step 1002: hMME sends a handover request message 1 to hAMF.

示例性的,在hMME上配置一个默认的hAMF,当hMME接收到eNB的切换请求消息1后,hMME根据第二切换原因值确认UE从4G网络切换到5G网络,且target gNB ID对应的PLMN ID不属于归属运营商网络对应的PLMN ID,直接将该切换请求消息1转发到默认配置的hAMF上。Exemplarily, a default hAMF is configured on the hMME. When the hMME receives the switching request message 1 from the eNB, the hMME confirms that the UE switches from the 4G network to the 5G network according to the second switching reason value, and the PLMN ID corresponding to the target gNB ID does not belong to the PLMN ID corresponding to the home operator network, and directly forwards the switching request message 1 to the default configured hAMF.

步骤1003:hAMF根据切换请求消息1,生成会话建立请求消息,并将会话建立请求消息封装在N14容器中,向vAMF发送N14消息1。Step 1003: hAMF generates a session establishment request message according to the switching request message 1, encapsulates the session establishment request message in an N14 container, and sends the N14 message 1 to the vAMF.

其中,N14消息1中包含该N14容器。The N14 message 1 includes the N14 container.

hAMF根据切换请求消息1中的第二切换原因值确定UE从4G网络切换到5G网络,进而根据切换请求消息1中的target gNB ID确定target gNB ID对应的PLMN ID,并根据hAMF上配置的拜访运营商网络的PLMN ID与vAMF的对应关系,选择target gNB ID对应的PLMN ID所述对应的vAMF。hAMF determines that the UE switches from the 4G network to the 5G network based on the second switching reason value in the switching request message 1, and then determines the PLMN ID corresponding to the target gNB ID based on the target gNB ID in the switching request message 1, and selects the vAMF corresponding to the PLMN ID corresponding to the target gNB ID based on the correspondence between the PLMN ID of the visited operator network configured on the hAMF and the vAMF.

hAMF根据切换请求消息1中的MME UE context将EPS context转化成5GS MM context。示例性的,hAMF可以根据EPS context中的EPS PDN connection包括的SMF+PGW-C的S5或S8接口地址及FQDN向hNRF请求获取SMF+PGW-C的N11或N16接口处的地址或者FQDN,并将其包含在5GS MM context中。此外,hAMF通过hNRF和vNRF根据target gNB ID请求v-SMF的ID。hAMF converts EPS context into 5GS MM context according to MME UE context in handover request message 1. For example, hAMF can request hNRF to obtain the address or FQDN at the N11 or N16 interface of SMF+PGW-C according to the S5 or S8 interface address and FQDN of SMF+PGW-C included in the EPS PDN connection in EPS context, and include it in 5GS MM context. In addition, hAMF requests the ID of v-SMF according to the target gNB ID through hNRF and vNRF.

会话建立请求消息中可以携带5GS MM context。The session establishment request message can carry 5GS MM context.

可选的,N14消息1中还可以包括v-SMF的ID和转发指示(forward_indication),转发指示用于指示vAMF将接收到的消息转发给v-SMF或者hAMF。Optionally, the N14 message 1 may also include the ID of the v-SMF and a forwarding indication (forward_indication), where the forwarding indication is used to instruct the vAMF to forward the received message to the v-SMF or hAMF.

步骤1004:vAMF解析N14消息,根据N14消息1中的转发指示将N14容器中的会话建立请求消息发到v-SMF的ID所对应的v-SMF。Step 1004: vAMF parses the N14 message, and sends the session establishment request message in the N14 container to the v-SMF corresponding to the v-SMF ID according to the forwarding instruction in the N14 message 1.

步骤1005:vSMF完成拜访运营商网络切换准备。Step 1005: vSMF completes the preparation for switching to the visited operator network.

步骤1006:vSMF向vAMF发送会话建立响应消息。Step 1006: vSMF sends a session establishment response message to vAMF.

例如,会话建立响应消息可以是PDU会话上下文响应(Nsmf_PDUSession_CreateSMContext response)。For example, the session establishment response message can be a PDU session context response (Nsmf_PDUSession_CreateSMContext response).

步骤1007:vAMF接收到vSMF发送的会话建立响应消息后,将会话建立响应消息封装到N14容器中,根据N14消息1中的转发指示向hAMF发送N14消息2,N14消息2中包含该N14容器。Step 1007: After receiving the session establishment response message sent by vSMF, vAMF encapsulates the session establishment response message into an N14 container, and sends an N14 message 2 to hAMF according to the forwarding instruction in the N14 message 1, and N14 message 2 includes the N14 container.

步骤1008:hAMF解析N14消息2后解析得到会话建立响应消息,与拜访运营商网络侧的网元(如v-SMF和vUPF)及归属运营商网络侧的网元(如hSMF+PGW-C和,hUPF)等进行交互,完成5GS的切换准备,并向hMME发送切换响应消息,切换响应消息用于响应切换请求消息1。Step 1008: After parsing N14 message 2, hAMF obtains a session establishment response message, interacts with network elements on the visited operator network side (such as v-SMF and vUPF) and network elements on the home operator network side (such as hSMF+PGW-C and hUPF), completes the switching preparation for 5GS, and sends a switching response message to hMME. The switching response message is used to respond to the switching request message 1.

步骤1009:hMME向eNB发送切换命令,以触发UE切换到目标接入网设备发起切换。Step 1009: hMME sends a handover command to the eNB to trigger the UE to switch to the target access network device to initiate handover.

步骤1010:eNB向UE发送切换命令,UE向共享RAN发起切换流程。Step 1010: the eNB sends a handover command to the UE, and the UE initiates a handover process to the shared RAN.

步骤1011:当UE切换到目标接入网设备之后,UE通过共享RAN(即目标接入网设备)向vAMF发送切换完成通知消息,切换完成通知消息用于通知UE已切换到拜访运营商网络中的5G网络。Step 1011: After the UE switches to the target access network device, the UE sends a switching completion notification message to the vAMF through the shared RAN (i.e., the target access network device). The switching completion notification message is used to notify the UE that it has switched to the 5G network in the visited operator network.

步骤1012:vAMF将切换完成通知消息封装在N14容器中,向hAMF发送N14消息3,N14消息3中包含该N14容器。Step 1012: vAMF encapsulates the switching completion notification message in an N14 container and sends an N14 message 3 to hAMF, where the N14 message 3 includes the N14 container.

步骤1013:hAMF解析N14消息3得到切换完成通知消息后,向hMME发送切换完成通知消息。 Step 1013: After hAMF parses N14 message 3 to obtain a handover completion notification message, it sends a handover completion notification message to hMME.

步骤1014:hMME收到hAMF发送的切换完成通知消息后,释放EPS相关的承载。之后,hMME向hAMF发送切换完成确认消息。Step 1014: After receiving the handover completion notification message sent by the hAMF, the hMME releases the EPS-related bearers. After that, the hMME sends a handover completion confirmation message to the hAMF.

步骤1015:hAMF将hMME发送的切换完成确认消息封装在N14容器中,向vAMF发送N14消息4,N14消息4中包括该N14容器。Step 1015: hAMF encapsulates the handover completion confirmation message sent by hMME in an N14 container, and sends N14 message 4 to vAMF, where N14 message 4 includes the N14 container.

基于上述方法,可以保证UE从归属运营商网络的4G网络到拜访运营商网络的5G网络移动时保持业务的连续性的方法。Based on the above method, it is possible to ensure that service continuity is maintained when the UE moves from the 4G network of the home operator network to the 5G network of the visited operator network.

基于以上实施例,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置,参阅图11所示,通信装置1100可以包括收发单元1101和处理单元1102。其中,收发单元1101用于通信装置1100接收消息(信息或数据)或发送消息(信息或数据),处理单元1102用于对所述通信装置1100的动作进行控制管理。处理单元1102还可以控制所述收发单元1101执行的步骤。Based on the above embodiments, the embodiments of the present application further provide a communication device, as shown in FIG11 , the communication device 1100 may include a transceiver unit 1101 and a processing unit 1102. The transceiver unit 1101 is used for the communication device 1100 to receive messages (information or data) or send messages (information or data), and the processing unit 1102 is used to control and manage the actions of the communication device 1100. The processing unit 1102 may also control the steps performed by the transceiver unit 1101.

示例性地,该通信装置1100具体可以是上述实施例中的第一移动管理网元、所述第一移动管理网元的处理器,或者芯片,或者芯片系统,或者是一个功能模块等;或者,该通信装置1100具体可以是上述实施例中的第二移动管理网元、所述第二移动管理网元的处理器,或者芯片,或者芯片系统,或者是一个功能模块等。Exemplarily, the communication device 1100 may specifically be the first mobile management network element in the above-mentioned embodiment, the processor of the first mobile management network element, or a chip, or a chip system, or a functional module, etc.; or, the communication device 1100 may specifically be the second mobile management network element in the above-mentioned embodiment, the processor of the second mobile management network element, or a chip, or a chip system, or a functional module, etc.

在一个实施例中,通信装置1100用于实现上述图3或图4所示实施例中第一移动管理网元的功能时:收发单元1101可以用于从第一接入网设备接收第一切换请求消息,所述第一切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络;所述第一接入网设备为共享接入网设备,所述终端设备通过所述第一接入网设备接入所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络;处理单元1102可以用于根据所述第一切换请求消息,确定允许所述终端设备从所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络;收发单元1101还可以用于向第二移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息用于请求将所述终端设备从所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络;其中,所述第一移动管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第二移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络。In one embodiment, when the communication device 1100 is used to implement the function of the first mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in Figure 3 or Figure 4 above: the transceiver unit 1101 can be used to receive a first switching request message from the first access network device, and the first switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network; the first access network device is a shared access network device, and the terminal device accesses the first standard network in the first operator network through the first access network device; the processing unit 1102 can be used to determine, according to the first switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network; the transceiver unit 1101 can also be used to send a second switching request message to the second mobility management network element, and the second switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network; wherein the first mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network, and the second mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the second operator network.

在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一切换请求消息包括所述终端设备当前使用的第一PLMN的标识,处理单元1102在根据所述第一切换请求消息确定允许所述终端设备从所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络时,可以用于:确定所述第一PLMN的标识是所述第二运营商网络的共享PLMN标识,所述共享PLMN标识用于所述第二运营商网络的用户接入所述第一运营商网络的共享接入网设备。In an optional embodiment, the first switching request message includes an identifier of the first PLMN currently used by the terminal device. When the processing unit 1102 determines that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network based on the first switching request message, it can be used to: determine that the identifier of the first PLMN is a shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network, and the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access a shared access network device of the first operator network.

进一步地,所述第一切换请求消息还包括所述终端设备的目标接入网设备的标识;处理单元1102还可以用于:根据所述目标接入网设备的标识,确定所述目标接入网设备所属的第二PLMN的标识,所述第二PLMN与所述第二运营商网络对应;处理单元1102在确定所述第一PLMN的标识是所述第二运营商网络的共享PLMN标识时,可以用于:根据所述第一PLMN的标识和所述第二PLMN的标识,确定所述第一PLMN与所述第二PLMN属于等效PLMN。Furthermore, the first switching request message also includes an identifier of a target access network device of the terminal device; the processing unit 1102 can also be used to: determine, based on the identifier of the target access network device, an identifier of a second PLMN to which the target access network device belongs, the second PLMN corresponding to the second operator network; when the processing unit 1102 determines that the identifier of the first PLMN is a shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network, it can be used to: determine, based on the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN, that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs.

示例性的,处理单元1102在根据所述第一PLMN的标识和所述第二PLMN的标识,确定所述第一PLMN与所述第二PLMN属于等效PLMN时,可以用于:确定所述第一PLMN的标识和所述第二PLMN的标识存在等效映射关系。Exemplarily, when the processing unit 1102 determines that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs according to the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN, it can be used to: determine that there is an equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN.

在一种可能的方式中,处理单元1102还可以用于:在所述收发单元1101向所述第二移动管理网元发送所述第二切换请求消息之前,根据所述第一切换请求消息,生成所述第二切换请求消息。In a possible manner, the processing unit 1102 may also be configured to: generate the second switching request message according to the first switching request message before the transceiver unit 1101 sends the second switching request message to the second mobility management network element.

可选的,处理单元1102在根据所述第一切换请求消息,生成所述第二切换请求消息时,可以用于:生成所述第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息包括所述第二PLMN的标识以及所述第一切换请求消息中除所述第一PLMN的标识之外的信息。Optionally, when generating the second switching request message based on the first switching request message, the processing unit 1102 can be used to: generate the second switching request message, the second switching request message including the identifier of the second PLMN and information in the first switching request message except the identifier of the first PLMN.

在一种示例中,收发单元1101在向第二移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息时,可以用于:当所述第一切换请求消息包括第一切换原因值,且所述第一切换原因值用于指示所述终端设备从所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二制式网络时,向所述第二移动管理网元发送所述第二切换请求消息。In one example, when the transceiver unit 1101 sends a second switching request message to a second mobile management network element, it can be used to: when the first switching request message includes a first switching reason value, and the first switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the first standard network to the second standard network, send the second switching request message to the second mobile management network element.

一种方式下,所述第二切换请求消息包括所述第一切换原因值。In one embodiment, the second switching request message includes the first switching reason value.

一种可能的方式中,所述第二切换请求消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息转发给所述第一移动管理网元。 In a possible manner, the second handover request message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the second mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the first mobility management network element.

在另一个实施例中,通信装置1100用于实现上述图3或图4所示实施例中第二移动管理网元的功能时:收发单元1101可以用于从第一移动管理网元接收第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络;以及根据所述第二切换请求消息,向第三移动管理网元发送第三切换请求消息,所述第三切换请求消息用于请求将所述终端设备从第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络;其中,所述第一移动管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第二移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第三移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络。处理单元1102可以用于控制收发单元1101的操作。In another embodiment, when the communication device 1100 is used to implement the function of the second mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 above: the transceiver unit 1101 can be used to receive a second switching request message from the first mobility management network element, the second switching request message is used to request to switch the terminal device from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network; and according to the second switching request message, send a third switching request message to the third mobility management network element, the third switching request message is used to request to switch the terminal device from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network; wherein the first mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network, the second mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the second operator network, and the third mobility management network element belongs to the second standard network in the second operator network. The processing unit 1102 can be used to control the operation of the transceiver unit 1101.

在一种可选的实施方式中,收发单元1101在根据所述第二切换请求消息,向所述第三移动管理网元发送所述第三切换请求消息时,可以用于:当所述第二切换请求消息包括第一切换原因值,且所述第一切换原因值用于指示所述终端设备从所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二制式网络时,向所述第三移动管理网元发送所述第三切换请求消息。In an optional embodiment, when the transceiver unit 1101 sends the third switching request message to the third mobile management network element according to the second switching request message, it can be used to: when the second switching request message includes a first switching reason value, and the first switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the first-standard network to the second-standard network, send the third switching request message to the third mobile management network element.

一种示例中,所述第二切换请求消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息发送给所述第一移动管理网元;收发单元1101还可以用于:从所述第三移动管理网元接收切换完成通知消息,所述切换完成通知消息用于通知所述终端设备已切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络;根据所述第一指示信息,向所述第一移动管理网元发送所述切换完成通知消息。In one example, the second switching request message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the second mobile management network element to send the received switching completion notification message to the first mobile management network element; the transceiver unit 1101 can also be used to: receive a switching completion notification message from the third mobile management network element, and the switching completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that it has switched to the second-standard network in the second operator network; according to the first indication information, send the switching completion notification message to the first mobile management network element.

可选的,所述第二切换请求消息包括第二PLMN的标识,所述第二PLMN的标识用于标识所述终端设备的目标接入网设备所属的PLMN。Optionally, the second switching request message includes an identifier of a second PLMN, and the identifier of the second PLMN is used to identify the PLMN to which the target access network device of the terminal device belongs.

在另一个实施例中,通信装置1100用于实现上述图7或图8所示实施例中第二移动管理网元的功能时:收发单元1101可以用于从第三移动管理网元接收第一切换请求消息,所述第一切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络切换到第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络;处理单元1102可以用于根据所述第一切换请求消息,确定所述终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享接入网设备,所述目标接入网设备用于所述终端设备接入所述第一运营商网络;所述收发单元1101还可以用于根据所述第一切换请求消息,向第一移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息用于请求将所述终端设备从所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络;其中,所述第一移动管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第二移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第三移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络。In another embodiment, when the communication device 1100 is used to implement the function of the second mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in Figure 7 or Figure 8 above: the transceiver unit 1101 can be used to receive a first switching request message from the third mobility management network element, and the first switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network; the processing unit 1102 can be used to determine, according to the first switching request message, that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device, and the target access network device is used for the terminal device to access the first operator network; the transceiver unit 1101 can also be used to send a second switching request message to the first mobility management network element according to the first switching request message, and the second switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network; wherein the first mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the first operator network, the second mobility management network element belongs to the first standard network in the second operator network, and the third mobility management network element belongs to the second standard network in the second operator network.

在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一切换请求消息包括所述目标接入网设备的标识;处理单元1102在根据所述第一切换请求消息确定所述终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享接入网设备时,可以用于:根据所述目标接入网设备的标识,确定所述目标接入网设备所属的第一PLMN的标识,所述第一PLMN与所述第一运营商网络对应;若所述第一PLMN的标识与共享PLMN标识对应,则确定所述终端设备的所述目标接入网设备为所述共享接入网设备;其中,所述共享PLMN标识用于所述第二运营商网络的用户接入所述第一运营商网络的共享接入网设备。In an optional embodiment, the first switching request message includes an identifier of the target access network device; when the processing unit 1102 determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device based on the first switching request message, it can be used to: determine, based on the identifier of the target access network device, an identifier of the first PLMN to which the target access network device belongs, the first PLMN corresponding to the first operator network; if the identifier of the first PLMN corresponds to a shared PLMN identifier, determine that the target access network device of the terminal device is the shared access network device; wherein the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access the shared access network device of the first operator network.

一种示例中,收发单元1101在根据所述第一切换请求消息,向第一移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息时,可以用于:当所述第一切换请求消息包括第二切换原因值,且所述第二切换原因值用于指示所述终端设备从所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一制式网络时,向所述第一移动管理网元发送所述第二切换请求消息。In one example, when the transceiver unit 1101 sends a second switching request message to the first mobile management network element according to the first switching request message, it can be used to: when the first switching request message includes a second switching reason value, and the second switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the second-standard network to the first-standard network, send the second switching request message to the first mobile management network element.

可选的,处理单元1102还可以用于:在收发单元1101向所述第一移动管理网元发送所述第二切换请求消息之前,根据所述第一切换请求消息,生成所述第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息中包含所述共享PLMN标识以及所述第一切换请求消息中包含的信息。Optionally, the processing unit 1102 can also be used to: generate the second switching request message according to the first switching request message before the transceiver unit 1101 sends the second switching request message to the first mobile management network element, wherein the second switching request message includes the shared PLMN identifier and the information included in the first switching request message.

示例性的,所述第二切换请求消息中包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息转发给所述第二移动管理网元。Exemplarily, the second handover request message includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to instruct the first mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the second mobility management network element.

在另一个实施例中,通信装置1100用于实现上述图7或图8所示实施例中第一移动管理网元的功能时:收发单元1101可以用于从第二移动管理网元接收第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络切换到第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络;处理单元1102可以用于根据所述第二切换请求消息,确定允许所述终端设备从所述第二运营商网络中的所 述第二制式网络切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络;收发单元1101还可以用于根据所述第二切换请求消息,向第一会话管理网元发送会话建立请求消息;其中,所述第一移动管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第二移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第一会话管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络。In another embodiment, when the communication device 1100 is used to implement the function of the first mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in Figure 7 or Figure 8 above: the transceiver unit 1101 can be used to receive a second switching request message from the second mobility management network element, and the second switching request message is used to request that the terminal device be switched from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network; the processing unit 1102 can be used to determine, according to the second switching request message, whether the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second standard network in the second operator network to the first standard network in the first operator network. The second-standard network is switched to the first-standard network in the first operator network; the transceiver unit 1101 can also be used to send a session establishment request message to the first session management network element according to the second switching request message; wherein the first mobile management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the first operator network, the second mobile management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the second operator network, and the first session management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the first operator network.

在一些实施例中,所述第二切换请求消息包括共享PLMN标识,所述共享PLMN标识用于所述第二运营商网络的用户接入所述第一运营商网络的共享接入网设备;处理单元1102在根据所述第二切换请求消息,确定允许所述终端设备从所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络时,可以用于:当所述终端设备当前使用的第二PLMN的标识与所述共享PLMN标识存在等效映射关系,则确定允许所述终端设备从所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络。In some embodiments, the second switching request message includes a shared PLMN identifier, and the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access the shared access network device of the first operator network; when the processing unit 1102 determines, based on the second switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network, it can be used to: when there is an equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the second PLMN currently used by the terminal device and the shared PLMN identifier, determine that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network.

在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第二切换请求消息中包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息转发给所述第二移动管理网元;收发单元1101还可以用于:接收到切换完成通知消息,所述切换完成通知消息用于通知所述终端设备已切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络;根据所述第二指示信息,向所述第二移动管理网元发送所述切换完成通知消息。In an optional implementation, the second switching request message includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to instruct the first mobile management network element to forward the received switching completion notification message to the second mobile management network element; the transceiver unit 1101 can also be used to: receive a switching completion notification message, and the switching completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that it has switched to the first standard network in the first operator network; according to the second indication information, send the switching completion notification message to the second mobile management network element.

需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对单元的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。在本申请的实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。It should be noted that the division of units in the embodiments of the present application is schematic and is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation. Each functional unit in the embodiments of the present application may be integrated into a processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.

所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) or a processor (processor) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code.

基于以上实施例,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置,参阅图12所示,通信装置1200可以包括存储器1201和处理器1202。Based on the above embodiments, the embodiments of the present application further provide a communication device. Referring to FIG. 12 , the communication device 1200 may include a memory 1201 and a processor 1202 .

具体地,处理器1202可以是中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),网络处理器(network processor,NP)或者CPU和NP的组合。处理器1202还可以进一步包括硬件芯片。上述硬件芯片可以是专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(complex programmable logic device,CPLD),现场可编程逻辑门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA),通用阵列逻辑(generic array logic,GAL)或其任意组合。Specifically, the processor 1202 may be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP) or a combination of a CPU and a NP. The processor 1202 may further include a hardware chip. The hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD) or a combination thereof. The PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a generic array logic (GAL) or any combination thereof.

其中,存储器1201和处理器1202之间相互连接。可选的,存储器1201和处理器1202通过总线1203相互连接;所述总线1203可以是外设部件互连标准(Peripheral Component Interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(Extended Industry Standard Architecture,EISA)总线等。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图12中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。Among them, the memory 1201 and the processor 1202 are interconnected. Optionally, the memory 1201 and the processor 1202 are interconnected via a bus 1203; the bus 1203 may be a Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus or an Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) bus, etc. The bus may be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, etc. For ease of representation, FIG12 is represented by only one thick line, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.

在一种可选的实施方式中,存储器1201,用于存放指令等。存储器1201可能包括RAM,也可能还包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory),例如一个或多个磁盘存储器。所述处理器1202执行所述存储器1201所存放的计算机指令,实现上述功能,从而实现通信装置1200的功能。In an optional implementation, the memory 1201 is used to store instructions, etc. The memory 1201 may include RAM, and may also include non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as one or more disk memories. The processor 1202 executes the computer instructions stored in the memory 1201 to implement the above functions, thereby realizing the functions of the communication device 1200.

可选的,通信装置1200还可以包括收发器,其中,处理器1202可以控制收发器接收和发送消息、信息或数据等。具体图中不再示出。Optionally, the communication device 1200 may further include a transceiver, wherein the processor 1202 may control the transceiver to receive and send messages, information or data, etc. The specific figure is not shown again.

示例性地,该通信装置1200具体可以是上述实施例中的第一移动管理网元;或者,该通信装置1200具体可以是上述实施例中的第二移动管理网元。Exemplarily, the communication device 1200 may specifically be the first mobility management network element in the above embodiment; or, the communication device 1200 may specifically be the second mobility management network element in the above embodiment.

在一个实施例中,所述通信装置1200在实现上述图3或图4所示实施例中第一移动管理网元的功能时,处理器1202可以调用存储器1201中的计算机指令实现上述图3或图4所示实施例中由第一移动 管理网元执行的操作。具体的相关具体描述可以参见上述图3或图4所示实施例中的相关描述,此处不再详细介绍。In one embodiment, when the communication device 1200 implements the function of the first mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4, the processor 1202 may call the computer instructions in the memory 1201 to implement the first mobile management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4. The operations performed by the management network element. For specific related descriptions, please refer to the related descriptions in the embodiments shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 above, which will not be described in detail here.

在另一个实施例中,所述通信装置1200在实现上述图3或图4所示实施例中第二移动管理网元的功能时,处理器1202可以调用存储器1201中的计算机指令实现上述图3或图4所示实施例中由第二移动管理网元执行的操作。具体的相关具体描述可以参见上述图3或图4所示实施例中的相关描述,此处不再详细介绍。In another embodiment, when the communication device 1200 implements the function of the second mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4, the processor 1202 may call the computer instructions in the memory 1201 to implement the operation performed by the second mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4. For specific related descriptions, please refer to the related descriptions in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4, which will not be described in detail here.

在另一个实施例中,所述通信装置1200在实现上述图7或图8所示实施例中第一移动管理网元的功能时,处理器1202可以调用存储器1201中的计算机指令实现上述图7或图8所示实施例中由第一移动管理网元执行的操作。具体的相关具体描述可以参见上述图7或图8所示实施例中的相关描述,此处不再详细介绍。In another embodiment, when the communication device 1200 implements the function of the first mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8, the processor 1202 may call the computer instructions in the memory 1201 to implement the operation performed by the first mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8. For specific related descriptions, please refer to the related descriptions in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8, which will not be described in detail here.

在另一个实施例中,所述通信装置1200在实现上述图7或图8所示实施例中第二移动管理网元的功能时,处理器1202可以调用存储器1201中的计算机指令实现上述图7或图8所示实施例中由第二移动管理网元执行的操作。具体的相关具体描述可以参见上述图7或图8所示实施例中的相关描述,此处不再详细介绍。In another embodiment, when the communication device 1200 implements the function of the second mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8, the processor 1202 may call the computer instructions in the memory 1201 to implement the operation performed by the second mobility management network element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8. For specific related descriptions, please refer to the related descriptions in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8, which will not be described in detail here.

基于以上实施例,本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统可以包括上述实施例涉及的第一移动管理网元和第二移动管理网元等。Based on the above embodiments, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, which may include the first mobility management network element and the second mobility management network element involved in the above embodiments.

本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储指令,该指令被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的通信方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is used to store instructions. When the instructions are executed by a computer, the computer can implement the communication method provided by the above method embodiment.

本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储指令,该指令被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的通信方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which is used to store instructions. When the instructions are executed by a computer, the computer can implement the communication method provided by the above method embodiment.

本申请实施例还提供一种芯片,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,用于调用所述存储器中的指令使得所述芯片实现上述方法实施例提供的种通信方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including a processor, wherein the processor is coupled to a memory and is used to call instructions in the memory so that the chip implements the communication method provided in the above method embodiment.

本申请实施例还提供一种芯片,所述芯片与存储器耦合,所述芯片用于实现上述方法实施例提供的通信方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, which is coupled to a memory and is used to implement the communication method provided in the above method embodiment.

本领域内的技术人员应明白,本申请的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此,本申请可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且,本申请可采用在一个或多个其中包含有指令的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、CD-ROM、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the embodiments of the present application may be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Therefore, the present application may adopt the form of a complete hardware embodiment, a complete software embodiment, or an embodiment in combination with software and hardware. Moreover, the present application may adopt the form of a computer program product implemented on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) containing instructions.

本申请是参照根据本申请的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。The present application is described with reference to the flowchart and/or block diagram of the method, device (system), and computer program product according to the present application. It should be understood that each flow and/or box in the flow chart and/or block diagram, as well as the combination of the flow chart and/or box in the flow chart and/or block diagram can be implemented by instructions. These instructions can be provided to a processor of a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, an embedded processor or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine, so that the instructions executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing device produce a device for implementing the function specified in one flow chart or multiple flows and/or one box or multiple boxes in the block diagram.

这些指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中,使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。These instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to operate in a specific manner, so that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce a manufactured product including an instruction device that implements the functions specified in one or more processes in the flowchart and/or one or more boxes in the block diagram.

这些指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These instructions may also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device so that a series of operational steps are executed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process, whereby the instructions executed on the computer or other programmable device provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more processes in the flowchart and/or one or more boxes in the block diagram.

显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。 Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the scope of the present application. Thus, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalents, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (28)

一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising: 第一移动管理网元从第一接入网设备接收第一切换请求消息,所述第一切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络;所述第一接入网设备为共享接入网设备,所述终端设备通过所述第一接入网设备接入所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络;The first mobility management network element receives a first switching request message from a first access network device, where the first switching request message is used to request that a terminal device be switched from a first-standard network in a first operator network to a second-standard network in a second operator network; the first access network device is a shared access network device, and the terminal device accesses the first-standard network in the first operator network through the first access network device; 所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第一切换请求消息,确定允许所述终端设备从所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络;The first mobility management network element determines, according to the first switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network; 所述第一移动管理网元向第二移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息用于请求将所述终端设备从所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络;The first mobility management network element sends a second switching request message to the second mobility management network element, where the second switching request message is used to request switching of the terminal device from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network; 其中,所述第一移动管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第二移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络。The first mobility management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the first operator network, and the second mobility management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the second operator network. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一切换请求消息包括所述终端设备当前使用的第一公用陆地移动网PLMN的标识,所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第一切换请求消息确定允许所述终端设备从所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the first switching request message includes an identifier of a first public land mobile network PLMN currently used by the terminal device, and the first mobility management network element determines, according to the first switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the first standard network in the first operator network to the second standard network in the second operator network, comprising: 所述第一移动管理网元确定所述第一PLMN的标识是所述第二运营商网络的共享PLMN标识,所述共享PLMN标识用于所述第二运营商网络的用户接入所述第一运营商网络的共享接入网设备。The first mobility management network element determines that the identifier of the first PLMN is a shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network, and the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access a shared access network device of the first operator network. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一切换请求消息还包括所述终端设备的目标接入网设备的标识;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the first switching request message also includes an identifier of a target access network device of the terminal device; the method further includes: 所述第一移动管理网元根据所述目标接入网设备的标识,确定所述目标接入网设备所属的第二PLMN的标识,所述第二PLMN与所述第二运营商网络对应;The first mobility management network element determines, according to the identifier of the target access network device, an identifier of a second PLMN to which the target access network device belongs, where the second PLMN corresponds to the second operator network; 所述第一移动管理网元确定所述第一PLMN的标识是所述第二运营商网络的共享PLMN标识,包括:The first mobility management network element determines that the identifier of the first PLMN is a shared PLMN identifier of the second operator network, including: 所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第一PLMN的标识和所述第二PLMN的标识,确定所述第一PLMN与所述第二PLMN属于等效PLMN。The first mobility management network element determines, according to the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN, that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第一PLMN的标识和所述第二PLMN的标识,确定所述第一PLMN与所述第二PLMN属于等效PLMN,包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the first mobility management network element determines, based on the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN, that the first PLMN and the second PLMN are equivalent PLMNs, comprising: 所述第一移动管理网元确定所述第一PLMN的标识和所述第二PLMN的标识存在等效映射关系。The first mobility management network element determines that there is an equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the first PLMN and the identifier of the second PLMN. 如权利要求3或4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一移动管理网元向所述第二移动管理网元发送所述第二切换请求消息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 3 or 4, characterized in that before the first mobility management network element sends the second handover request message to the second mobility management network element, the method further comprises: 所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第一切换请求消息,生成所述第二切换请求消息。The first mobility management network element generates the second handover request message according to the first handover request message. 如权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第一切换请求消息,生成所述第二切换请求消息,包括:The method according to claim 5, wherein the first mobility management network element generates the second handover request message according to the first handover request message, comprising: 所述第一移动管理网元生成所述第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息包括所述第二PLMN的标识以及所述第一切换请求消息中除所述第一PLMN的标识之外的信息。The first mobility management network element generates the second handover request message, where the second handover request message includes the identifier of the second PLMN and information in the first handover request message except the identifier of the first PLMN. 如权利要求1-6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一移动管理网元向第二移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the first mobility management network element sends a second handover request message to the second mobility management network element, comprising: 当所述第一切换请求消息包括第一切换原因值,且所述第一切换原因值用于指示所述终端设备从所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二制式网络时,所述第一移动管理网元向所述第二移动管理网元发送所述第二切换请求消息。When the first switching request message includes a first switching reason value, and the first switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the first-standard network to the second-standard network, the first mobility management network element sends the second switching request message to the second mobility management network element. 如权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二切换请求消息包括所述第一切换原因值。The method as claimed in claim 7 is characterized in that the second switching request message includes the first switching reason value. 如权利要求1-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二切换请求消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息转发给所述第一移动管理网元。 The method according to any one of claims 1-8 is characterized in that the second switching request message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the second mobility management network element to forward the received switching completion notification message to the first mobility management network element. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising: 第二移动管理网元从第一移动管理网元接收第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络切换到第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络;The second mobility management network element receives a second switching request message from the first mobility management network element, where the second switching request message is used to request switching of the terminal device from a first-standard network in the first operator network to a second-standard network in the second operator network; 所述第二移动管理网元根据所述第二切换请求消息,向第三移动管理网元发送第三切换请求消息,所述第三切换请求消息用于请求将所述终端设备从第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络;The second mobility management network element sends a third switching request message to a third mobility management network element according to the second switching request message, where the third switching request message is used to request switching of the terminal device from the first-standard network in the first operator network to the second-standard network in the second operator network; 其中,所述第一移动管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第二移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第三移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络。Among them, the first mobility management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the first operator network, the second mobility management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the second operator network, and the third mobility management network element belongs to the second-standard network in the second operator network. 如权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二移动管理网元根据所述第二切换请求消息,向所述第三移动管理网元发送所述第三切换请求消息,包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein the second mobility management network element sends the third handover request message to the third mobility management network element according to the second handover request message, comprising: 当所述第二切换请求消息包括第一切换原因值,且所述第一切换原因值用于指示所述终端设备从所述第一制式网络切换到所述第二制式网络时,所述第二移动管理网元向所述第三移动管理网元发送所述第三切换请求消息。When the second switching request message includes a first switching reason value, and the first switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the first-standard network to the second-standard network, the second mobility management network element sends the third switching request message to the third mobility management network element. 如权利要求10或11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二切换请求消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息发送给所述第一移动管理网元;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 10 or 11, characterized in that the second handover request message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the second mobility management network element to send the received handover completion notification message to the first mobility management network element; the method further includes: 所述第二移动管理网元从所述第三移动管理网元接收切换完成通知消息,所述切换完成通知消息用于通知所述终端设备已切换到所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络;The second mobility management network element receives a switching completion notification message from the third mobility management network element, where the switching completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that the terminal device has switched to the second-standard network in the second operator network; 所述第二移动管理网元根据所述第一指示信息,向所述第一移动管理网元发送所述切换完成通知消息。The second mobility management network element sends the switching completion notification message to the first mobility management network element according to the first indication information. 如权利要求10-12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二切换请求消息包括第二PLMN的标识,所述第二PLMN的标识用于标识所述终端设备的目标接入网设备所属的PLMN。The method according to any one of claims 10-12 is characterized in that the second switching request message includes an identifier of a second PLMN, and the identifier of the second PLMN is used to identify the PLMN to which the target access network device of the terminal device belongs. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising: 第二移动管理网元从第三移动管理网元接收第一切换请求消息,所述第一切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络切换到第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络;The second mobility management network element receives a first switching request message from the third mobility management network element, where the first switching request message is used to request switching of the terminal device from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network; 所述第二移动管理网元根据所述第一切换请求消息,确定所述终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享接入网设备,所述目标接入网设备用于所述终端设备接入所述第一运营商网络;The second mobility management network element determines, according to the first switching request message, that a target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device, and the target access network device is used for the terminal device to access the first operator network; 所述第二移动管理网元根据所述第一切换请求消息,向第一移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息用于请求将所述终端设备从所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络;The second mobility management network element sends a second switching request message to the first mobility management network element according to the first switching request message, where the second switching request message is used to request switching of the terminal device from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network; 其中,所述第一移动管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第二移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第三移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络。Among them, the first mobility management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the first operator network, the second mobility management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the second operator network, and the third mobility management network element belongs to the second-standard network in the second operator network. 如权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一切换请求消息包括所述目标接入网设备的标识;所述第二移动管理网元根据所述第一切换请求消息确定所述终端设备的目标接入网设备为共享接入网设备,包括:The method according to claim 14, wherein the first handover request message includes an identifier of the target access network device; and the second mobility management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is a shared access network device according to the first handover request message, comprising: 所述第二移动管理网元根据所述目标接入网设备的标识,确定所述目标接入网设备所属的第一PLMN的标识,所述第一PLMN与所述第一运营商网络对应;The second mobility management network element determines, according to the identifier of the target access network device, an identifier of a first PLMN to which the target access network device belongs, where the first PLMN corresponds to the first operator network; 若所述第一PLMN的标识与共享PLMN标识对应,则所述第二移动管理网元确定所述终端设备的所述目标接入网设备为所述共享接入网设备;If the identifier of the first PLMN corresponds to the shared PLMN identifier, the second mobility management network element determines that the target access network device of the terminal device is the shared access network device; 其中,所述共享PLMN标识用于所述第二运营商网络的用户接入所述第一运营商网络的共享接入网设备。The shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access a shared access network device of the first operator network. 如权利要求14或15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二移动管理网元根据所述第一切换请求消息,向第一移动管理网元发送第二切换请求消息,包括:The method according to claim 14 or 15, characterized in that the second mobility management network element sends a second handover request message to the first mobility management network element according to the first handover request message, comprising: 当所述第一切换请求消息包括第二切换原因值,且所述第二切换原因值用于指示所述终端设备从所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一制式网络时,所述第二移动管理网元向所述第一移动管理网元发送所述第二切换请求消息。 When the first switching request message includes a second switching reason value, and the second switching reason value is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the second-standard network to the first-standard network, the second mobility management network element sends the second switching request message to the first mobility management network element. 如权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二移动管理网元向所述第一移动管理网元发送所述第二切换请求消息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 15, characterized in that before the second mobility management network element sends the second handover request message to the first mobility management network element, the method further comprises: 所述第二移动管理网元根据所述第一切换请求消息,生成所述第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息中包含所述共享PLMN标识以及所述第一切换请求消息中包含的信息。The second mobility management network element generates the second handover request message according to the first handover request message, where the second handover request message includes the shared PLMN identifier and the information included in the first handover request message. 如权利要求14-17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二切换请求消息中包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息转发给所述第二移动管理网元。The method as described in any one of claims 14-17 is characterized in that the second switching request message includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to instruct the first mobility management network element to forward the received switching completion notification message to the second mobility management network element. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising: 第一移动管理网元从第二移动管理网元接收第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第二运营商网络中的第二制式网络切换到第一运营商网络中的第一制式网络;The first mobility management network element receives a second switching request message from the second mobility management network element, where the second switching request message is used to request switching of the terminal device from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network; 所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第二切换请求消息,确定允许所述终端设备从所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络;The first mobility management network element determines, according to the second switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network; 所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第二切换请求消息,向第一会话管理网元发送会话建立请求消息;The first mobility management network element sends a session establishment request message to the first session management network element according to the second handover request message; 其中,所述第一移动管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第二移动管理网元属于所述第二运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,所述第一会话管理网元属于所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络。Among them, the first mobility management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the first operator network, the second mobility management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the second operator network, and the first session management network element belongs to the first-standard network in the first operator network. 如权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二切换请求消息包括共享PLMN标识,所述共享PLMN标识用于所述第二运营商网络的用户接入所述第一运营商网络的共享接入网设备;所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第二切换请求消息,确定允许所述终端设备从所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络,包括:The method according to claim 19, wherein the second switching request message includes a shared PLMN identifier, and the shared PLMN identifier is used for users of the second operator network to access a shared access network device of the first operator network; the first mobility management network element determines, according to the second switching request message, that the terminal device is allowed to switch from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network, comprising: 当所述终端设备当前使用的第二PLMN的标识与所述共享PLMN标识存在等效映射关系,则所述第一移动管理网元确定允许所述终端设备从所述第二运营商网络中的所述第二制式网络切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络。When there is an equivalent mapping relationship between the identifier of the second PLMN currently used by the terminal device and the shared PLMN identifier, the first mobile management network element determines to allow the terminal device to switch from the second-standard network in the second operator network to the first-standard network in the first operator network. 如权利要求19或20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二切换请求消息中包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一移动管理网元将接收到的切换完成通知消息转发给所述第二移动管理网元;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 19 or 20, characterized in that the second handover request message includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to instruct the first mobility management network element to forward the received handover completion notification message to the second mobility management network element; the method further includes: 所述第一移动管理网元接收到切换完成通知消息,所述切换完成通知消息用于通知所述终端设备已切换到所述第一运营商网络中的所述第一制式网络;The first mobility management network element receives a switching completion notification message, where the switching completion notification message is used to notify the terminal device that the terminal device has switched to the first-standard network in the first operator network; 所述第一移动管理网元根据所述第二指示信息,向所述第二移动管理网元发送所述切换完成通知消息。The first mobility management network element sends the switching completion notification message to the second mobility management network element according to the second indication information. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行如权利要求1-9中任一项所述的方法的模块或单元,或者包括用于执行如权利要求19-21中任一项所述的方法的模块或单元。A communication device, characterized in that it comprises a module or unit for executing the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 9, or comprises a module or unit for executing the method as described in any one of claims 19 to 21. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行如权利要求10-13中任一项所述的方法的模块或单元,或者包括用于执行如权利要求14-18中任一项所述的方法的模块或单元。A communication device, characterized by comprising a module or unit for executing the method as claimed in any one of claims 10 to 13, or comprising a module or unit for executing the method as claimed in any one of claims 14 to 18. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括存储器和处理器,其中:A communication device, comprising a memory and a processor, wherein: 所述存储器用于存储计算机指令;The memory is used to store computer instructions; 所述处理器与所述存储器耦合,用于调用所述存储器中的计算机指令,以执行如权利要求1-21任一项所述的方法。The processor is coupled to the memory and is configured to call computer instructions in the memory to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-21. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,所述指令在被计算机调用时以执行如权利要求1-21中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the instructions are called by a computer, the method according to any one of claims 1 to 21 is executed. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,包含指令,当所述指令在计算机上运行时,使得如权利要求1-21中任一项所述的方法被执行。A computer program product, characterized in that it contains instructions, and when the instructions are run on a computer, the method according to any one of claims 1 to 21 is executed. 一种芯片,其特征在于,所述芯片与存储器耦合,用于读取并执行所述存储器中存储的指令,以实现如权利要求1-21中任一项所述的方法。A chip, characterized in that the chip is coupled to a memory and is used to read and execute instructions stored in the memory to implement the method as described in any one of claims 1-21. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括如权利要求22所述的通信装置和如权利要求23所述的通信装置。 A communication system, characterized by comprising the communication device as claimed in claim 22 and the communication device as claimed in claim 23.
PCT/CN2024/105529 2023-08-22 2024-07-15 Communication method and apparatus Pending WO2025039800A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202311062353.X 2023-08-22
CN202311062353.XA CN119521332A (en) 2023-08-22 2023-08-22 A communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025039800A1 true WO2025039800A1 (en) 2025-02-27

Family

ID=94667557

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2024/105529 Pending WO2025039800A1 (en) 2023-08-22 2024-07-15 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN119521332A (en)
WO (1) WO2025039800A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109819481A (en) * 2017-11-20 2019-05-28 华为技术有限公司 A kind of method for switching network and session management network element
WO2023130856A1 (en) * 2022-01-05 2023-07-13 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Communication method and apparatus, and core network device, terminal device and storage medium
CN116456320A (en) * 2022-01-05 2023-07-18 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Network access method, device and computer readable storage medium

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109819481A (en) * 2017-11-20 2019-05-28 华为技术有限公司 A kind of method for switching network and session management network element
WO2023130856A1 (en) * 2022-01-05 2023-07-13 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Communication method and apparatus, and core network device, terminal device and storage medium
CN116456320A (en) * 2022-01-05 2023-07-18 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Network access method, device and computer readable storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN119521332A (en) 2025-02-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP4029346B1 (en) Control of network slice
CN108574969B (en) Connection processing method and device in multi-access scenario
US20230132454A1 (en) Method and apparatus for supporting edge computing service for roaming ue in wireless communication system
KR20230034354A (en) Beam Management Enhancements for FR2 Using V-POL/H-POL Virtualization
CN114731714B (en) A method and device for establishing a session
KR20210024160A (en) Communication method and device
US11576219B2 (en) User equipment, control apparatus, and communication control method
CN116055311A (en) A communication method and device
US20240244107A1 (en) Method for determining application server
US20250039777A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
CN116456318A (en) Communication method, device and system
WO2023185880A1 (en) Access network device determining method
WO2023015973A1 (en) Network slice admission control method and apparatus
WO2024114288A1 (en) Network access method and communication apparatus
US20250380232A1 (en) Method for registering terminal device, and apparatus
WO2023143212A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
KR20200116852A (en) Apparatus and method for handling service policy in wireless communication system
US20240224147A1 (en) Apparatus and method for inter-plmn handover of home routed session in wireless communication system
WO2024074148A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus, and system
WO2023207958A1 (en) Policy transmission method, and communication apparatus and system
WO2023197772A1 (en) Communication method and related apparatus
WO2025039800A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2023138352A1 (en) Inter-system interoperation method and device
US12507161B2 (en) Control of network slice
WO2025081940A1 (en) Communication method, communication apparatus and communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24855528

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1